Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW 5 Series 2017-2023
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Dashboard
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
2
3
Roller sunblind in the rear win‐
dowꢀꢁ109
Memory functionꢀꢁ125
Massage functionꢀꢁ125
Safety switchꢀꢁ109
6
Lights
Power windowsꢀꢁ108
Light switchꢀꢁ173
4
5
Exterior mirror adjustment buttonꢀꢁ122
Seating comfort features
Lights off
Daytime driving lightsꢀꢁ175
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Parking lightsꢀꢁ174
Manual Speed Limiterꢀꢁ218
Automatic headlight controlꢀꢁ173
Adaptive light functionsꢀꢁ175
Depending on the equipment:
Cruise control on/offꢀꢁ220
Automatic High Beam Assis‐
tantꢀꢁ176
Low beamsꢀꢁ174
Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/offꢀꢁ222
Instrument lightingꢀꢁ178
Right roadside parking lightꢀꢁ174
Left roadside parking lightꢀꢁ174
With steering and traffic jam assis‐
Cruise control, distance control and
lane guidance on/off
Cruise control: to store the speed
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
gested speedꢀꢁ230
7
8
Central locking systemꢀꢁ95
Unlocking
Pausing cruise control
Locking
Continuing cruise control
Steering column stalk, left
Turn signalꢀꢁ143
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐
tance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
tance
High beams, headlight flasherꢀꢁ144
Cruise control rocker switch
Automatic High Beam Assis‐
tantꢀꢁ176
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection listsꢀꢁ168
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features:
Widgetsꢀꢁ155
Trip dataꢀꢁ168
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communicationꢀꢁ6
9
Steering wheel buttons, left
Voice activation systemꢀꢁ50
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Changing the station/track, see
Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communicationꢀꢁ6
14
15
16
17
18
Horn, entire surface
Steering wheel heatingꢀꢁ124
Adjusting the steering wheelꢀꢁ124
Unlocking the hoodꢀꢁ358
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communicationꢀꢁ6
Thumbwheel for selection listsꢀꢁ168
12 Steering column stalk, right
Wipersꢀꢁ144
Opening and closing the trunk
lidꢀꢁ100
Rain sensorꢀꢁ145
Cleaning the windshieldꢀꢁ146
13
Turning drive readiness state on/
offꢀꢁ135
Auto Start/Stop functionꢀꢁ135
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Dashboard
CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1
2
3
Control Displayꢀꢁ45
Ventilationꢀꢁ278
9
Parking assistance systemsꢀꢁ241
Panorama Viewꢀꢁ261
Hazard warning systemꢀꢁ374
Intelligent Safetyꢀꢁ184
10
Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ138
SPORT driving mode
4
5
Glove compartmentꢀꢁ299
COMFORT driving mode
ECO PRO driving mode
ADAPTIVE driving mode
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tionꢀꢁ6
6
7
8
Automatic climate controlꢀꢁ273
Controller with buttonsꢀꢁ46
Parking brakeꢀꢁ140
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trolꢀꢁ213
Automatic Holdꢀꢁ142
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and
options
Cameras
Front camera
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Front camera
Overview
Cameras behind the windshield
Depending on the equipment, the following cam‐
eras and sensors are installed in the vehicle:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The cameras are located in the area of the inte‐
rior mirror.
Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed.
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷ Camera behind the windshield: if the camera
Top view cameras
has overheated and been temporarily
switched off due to excessively high temper‐
atures.
▷ Camera behind the windshield: during cali‐
bration of the camera immediately after vehi‐
cle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐
terior mirror housing.
Radar sensors
Front radar sensor
Rearview camera
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.
The camera is located in the handle of the trunk
lid.
Radar sensors, side, front
System limits of the cameras
The cameras may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
curves.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered, for
instance by a fogged up windshield or labels.
The radar sensors are located in the bumper.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷ When it is dark outside.
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Radar sensors, side, rear
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors in the front/
rear bumpers
The ultrasound sensors of the
Park Distance Control PDC are lo‐
cated in the bumpers.
The radar sensors are located in the bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, side
System limits of the radar
sensors
The radar sensors may not be fully functional or
may not be available in the following situations:
▷ If sensors are dirty, such as due to icing.
▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,
films or a number plate baseplate.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐
stance due to parking damage.
The ultrasound sensors of the Automatic Parking
Assistant are located on the side of the vehicle.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov‐
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
following situations:
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov‐
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow hills,
vehicles or trailers.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ In case of dirty sensors.
▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the road.
▷ In case of covered sensors, such as due to la‐
bels.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
jacket.
▷ In case of external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles,
loud machines or other ultrasonic sources.
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative atmospheric humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
Warning
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
Idle state
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Principle
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from
the outside and after exiting and locking.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state
For instance, the idle state is automatically es‐
tablished under the following conditions:
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive: when
one or both front doors are opened after driv‐
ing when exiting the vehicle.
In some situations, the idle state is not set auto‐
matically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low beams are switched on.
Drive readiness
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose, the
driver and front passenger must exit the vehicle.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Safety information
DANGER
Manual idle state
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com‐
pletion of trip:
Press and hold the button on the
radio until the OFF indicator on
the instrument cluster goes out.
Standby state
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Principle
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
Desired settings can be adjusted.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
doors are opened from the outside.
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷ Set the parking brake.
Additional information:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
The activated drive readiness is indicated in the
instrument cluster, depending on the equipment,
by the display of information required for driving
or the READY display.
NOTICE
Turning off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or re‐
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid succes‐
sion can cause the starter to overheat. This
also results in unburned or inadequately burned
fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Avoid repeated
starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated
starting in rapid succession.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
3. Set the parking brake.
Turning on drive readiness
Principle
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
iDrive
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Input and display
Main menu
General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
certain functions.
Operating concept
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
General information
These functions can be operated as follows:
Media/Radio
▷ Via the Controller.
All functions of the entertainment system,
e.g., radio stations or connection with external
devices.
▷ Via the touchscreen.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Depending on the equipment: with the ges‐
ture control.
Communication
Phone and message functions, e-mail and
calendar, and also the connection and manage‐
ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.
Safety information
Warning
Navigation
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
Access to the navigation system, destination
input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
views and other functions, such as points of in‐
terest and areas to be avoided.
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
My Car
Information about vehicle status and trips.
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered
during entry for which data is available.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range of
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.
Apps
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐
hicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle func‐
tions can be purchased from the BMW Store.
Widgets
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐
quently used functions. The configured widgets
display dynamic contents such as the navigation
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be selected when mak‐
ing the destination input, for example.
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller, the touchpad, touchscreen or voice
control. The keyboard's display changes auto‐
matically.
Radio symbols
Icon
Meaning
Icon
Function
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
Telephone symbols
Icon Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Confirm entry.
Missed call.
Slide the input area to the left or
right.
Signal strength of mobile phone net‐
work.
Entry comparison
Network search.
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter and number
and added automatically as needed.
Mobile phone network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mobile
phone has been reached.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Icon Meaning
Icon Meaning
Roaming is active.
Locating is active.
Stop.
Data protection.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Destination guidance active.
Passengers on board.
Do not disturb.
Sending not possible.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
Entertainment symbols
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
Icon
Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB device.
Connected Music.
WLAN.
Overview
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Other symbols
Icon Meaning
Check Control message.
Programmable memory buttons
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.
Voice activation system active.
Storing a function
A function can be stored on a programmable
memory button. A button with a stored function
can be overwritten with another function.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio
station.
Checking the current vehicle position.
Driver profile.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until the displayed bar on the Control Display
has loaded completely.
Notifications.
Service notifications.
Information.
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Executing a function
Control Display
Safety information
Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Do not place
objects in the area in front of the Control Dis‐
play.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in
the upper area of the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically
Deleting all button assignments
All button assignments can be deleted.
The Control Display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and
ously for approx. 5 seconds.
simultane‐
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
2. "OK"
Control Display and
Controller
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touchscreen.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Screen off"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Overview
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
1
2
Control Display with touchscreen
Controller with buttons and touchpad
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Buttons on the Controller
Controller
Button Function
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Go to the main menu.
Go to the Media/Radio menu.
Go to the Communication menu.
Go to navigation map.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
Go to destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Go to the previous display.
Go to the Options menu.
Operating via the
Controller
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Adjusting contents
Selecting a menu
Depending on the equipment, the contents of
menus "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" can be ad‐
justed, for instance to remove the entries of
functions that are not used from the menu.
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select the desired setting.
Select a widget
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to the
right.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Settings", a new display appears.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is
selected.
3. Press the Controller.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The current display closes and the previous
display is shown.
Adjusting the menu
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷
Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
Going to the Options menu
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
justed.
Press the button.
2. Tip the Controller up.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
3. "Adjust main menu"
The menu consists of various areas, for instance:
4. Select the desired adjustment:
▷ "MEDIA": control options for the selected
main menu.
▷
Symbol and select desired widget: add
new widget.
▷ "Help": help for the selected menu.
▷ "Control display off": system settings.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page.
Entering letters and numbers
▷
Select icon: delete selected widget.
Input
▷ Add new page: "Add page".
1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number.
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page".
2.
: confirm entry.
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select
widget.
5. "Done"
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Deleting
Entering special characters
Icon Function
Input
Operation
Press the Controller: delete letter or
number.
Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the
ter.
touchpad.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let‐
ters or numbers.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
per area of the touchpad.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐
played in a text box.
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the
score.
lower area of the touchpad.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played in the list.
Function
Operation
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Operation via touchpad
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Display menu.
Tap once.
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries per‐
mit a direct jump to letters for which an entry ex‐
ists.
Selecting functions
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Touchpad"
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed in
the list.
5. Select the desired setting.
Entering letters and numbers
Operation via touchscreen
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
▷ The set language determines what input is
possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch
the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar
at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap arrow.
The main menu is displayed.
The new display opens.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Depending on the equipment version, tap
the
icon on the touchscreen or a key‐
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
justed.
board is displayed on the Control Display
when the touchscreen is approached.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
2.
Tap the icon in the main menu.
Deleting
3. Select the desired adjustment:
▷
Tap icon and select desired widget:
add new widget.
Icon Function
Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or
number.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page.
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:
deletes all letters or numbers.
▷
Tap icon: delete selected widget.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of
widget.
4. Tap "Done".
Showing/hiding the display bar
In the upper area of the Control Display, it is pos‐
sible to show or hide a display bar with additional
functions.
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
Function
Operation
▷ A language that is supported by the Personal
Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Setting the system language, refer to
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
▷ Always say commands in the configured sys‐
tem language.
Display menu.
Tap once.
Enter the following settings to access the full
range of functions:
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐
played in a text box.
▷ "Online speech processing" is activated.
▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive"
activated.
▷ Activation word is activated.
▷ The Driver profile is activated.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under
"Personalization" is activated.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services pur‐
chased from the ConnectedDrive Store.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Activating the voice control
system
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a per‐
sonal assistant that enables natural voice opera‐
tion of various vehicle functions. The Personal
Assistant simplifies the operation of the vehicle
with the automation of processes and habits.
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
General information
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐
ble depending on the national-market ver‐
sion.
The microphone on the driver's side is active.
▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
The microphones on the driver's or front pas‐
senger's side are active with the following
voice control, depending on where the activa‐
tion word was spoken.
▷ The system includes special microphones on
the driver side and the front passenger side.
▷ Say commands at a normal volume. Speaking
directly into the microphone does not im‐
prove the speech recognition.
Then say the command. The activation word and
the command can be spoken without pause in
one sentence. No other commands may be avail‐
able. In this case, operate the function via iDrive.
▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently as
well as with normal volume, emphasis, and
speed.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spoken.
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Activation word from third-party providers
Button on the steering wheel
Depending on the national-market version, some
third-party providers provide digital voice assis‐
tants, e.g., Siri, Amazon Alexa or Google Assis‐
tant.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
2. Say the command.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
connected smartphone in the vehicle. In addition
to the preset or personal activation word, the ac‐
tivation word from connected third-party provid‐
ers can be used.
Wake word
General information
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐
sonal wake word will start the system.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Preset wake word
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐
vated and deactivated.
1. "CAR"
6. "Third-party providers"
7. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word"
Ending voice control
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
7. "Wake word"
Personal wake word
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set up
in the active driver profile. The personal activa‐
tion word can also be changed or deleted.
Possible commands
General information
Most contents on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐
tries. Say list entries as shown.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addition,
such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Instructions can be issued or questions can be
asked where the Personal Assistant provides
support.
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set wake word"
9. Select the desired setting.
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
The voice control system and the feedback it
provides does not replace the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech recog‐
nition and quality of the feedback may vary.
Function examples
Vehicle status and vehicle information
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹
▷ ›Open Owner's Manual.‹
›How can the passenger airbag be deactivated‹
The Personal Assistant returns feedback. When
stationary, the section of the integrated Owner's
Manual is displayed on the Control Display.
Navigation
▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹
Menu items
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
▷ ›Take me home.‹
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹
1. Activating the voice control system.
2. ›MEDIA‹
Communication
3. ›Presets‹
For example, when a mobile phone is connected,
calls can be started or SMS can be sent.
The stored stations are displayed on the Control
Display.
▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹
▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹
Help for voice control
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right
there.‹
▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available spo‐
ken commands announced.
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
Entertainment
▷ ›What song is this?‹
▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹
▷ ›Next title.‹
▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read
out loud.
Climate control
Settings
▷ ›Turn off the air conditioning.‹
▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹
▷ ›I'm cold.‹
Setting the voice control
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
Windows and light
The short version of the voice control plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
▷ ›Open the windows automatically.‹
▷ ›Delete activation point for automatic power
window.‹
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ ›Ambient lighting.‹
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Owner's Manual via voice operation
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
6. "Response length"
The device must be connected via Apple Car‐
Play or Android Auto.
7. Select the desired setting.
1.
Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
conversations in the vehicle.
The voice activation of the smartphone is ac‐
tivated.
2.
Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Automating routines
General information
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic activation of the seat
heating from a specific outside temperature.
Rules are created for this purpose, which can be
activated and deactivated at any time.
6. "Speaking during voice output"
Online speech processing
Online voice processing improves the quality of
the speech recognition and search results for
points of interest. To use the functions, data is
transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted
connection and stored locally there.
Activate/deactivate
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
1. "CAR"
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Caring Car
Principle
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are
harmonized for the driver in a short-term pro‐
gram.
6. "Online speech processing"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid‐
ance until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the volume
of other audio sources is changed.
General information
By selecting a program, the interior lighting, cli‐
mate control and music selection will be ad‐
justed. A program takes 3 minutes.
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con‐
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice con‐
trol.
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
Overview
2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired program.
The program can be stopped prematurely:
"End program"
Adjusting a program
1. "CAR"
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
that are carried out in the area of the center con‐
sole at the height of the Control Display.
2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired program.
4. "Music settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
System limits
▷ The Personal Assistant provides information
about vehicle functions that may not be in‐
stalled in the vehicle.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Gesture control"
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
Settings
1. "CAR"
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and
glass sunroof closed.
2. "Settings"
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the occu‐
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems
with the speech recognition feature.
Carrying out gestures
▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
ror and next to the steering wheel.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re‐
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
▷ Execute gestures clearly.
▷ The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
BMW Gesture Control
Principle
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
motion using BMW Gesture Control.
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Possible gestures
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ Accept call.
rection of the screen.
Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice control.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Display Reject call.
in the direction of the front-passenger side.
Close pop-up.
End voice control.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern
with the index finger stretched out forward.
Increase the volume.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circular Reduce the volume.
pattern with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand Surround View: turn camera
horizontally to the right or left.
view.
This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐
ward.
Individually assignable gesture.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back and Reverse Skip function.
forth.
The previous title is played.
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
iDrive
CONTROLS
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move fist with thumb extended to right left back
and forth.
Forward Skip function.
The next title is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five
fingers out again.
Individually assignable gesture.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
Assigning gesture individually
General information
Two gestures can be assigned individually and
can be configured for certain functions, such as:
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
▷ Destination guidance to home address.
▷ Mute/Playback
▷ Control Display on/off
Select function
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
6. Select the desired setting.
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the head‐
liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐
stances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
page 384.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
Vehicle features and
options
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Functional requirement
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ A consent for the transmission of the corre‐
sponding data was given in the Data Protec‐
tion menu.
Principle
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhancements
or quality improvements available.
Search for an upgrade
Standby must be turned on to search for a soft‐
ware upgrade.
General information
Automatic search
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐
ble.
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in the
background.
Manual search
1. "CAR"
Safety information
2. "Settings"
Warning
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
successfully, the information about the version
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The
download does not require an approval.
This information is also available in the Connec‐
tedDrive customer portal.
Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
Via BMW app
1. "CAR"
If an upgrade is available, information about the
new software version is displayed in the BMW
app.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Info about version"
The data for the upgrade can then be down‐
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an ex‐
isting WLAN connection.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
The data can then be transmitted from the mo‐
bile device to the vehicle.
This transmission method accelerates the down‐
load of the data, for instance in areas with limited
mobile network availability.
Installing the upgrade
General information
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to
the smartphone.
▷ The installation of the upgrade may result in a
deletion of software changes such as per‐
formance increases that have not been instal‐
led by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and WLAN.
▷ Android: connect WLAN.
▷ The installation may take approx. 20 minutes.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐
lation.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the
background only while driving.
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐
tion.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
▷ The installation does not occur until the con‐
sent was given.
Additional information:
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer
Prerequisites for the installation
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
Information about the version
General information
The information about the version contains a de‐
scription of the updates that are included in the
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been completed
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷ Engine is turned off and sufficiently cooled
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
down.
▷ Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning is
not activated via iDrive.
▷ Hazard warning system.
If applicable, follow the notes for further prerequi‐
sites on the control display.
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi‐
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade
will not be offered for installation.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
Pay attention to an offer for installation, for in‐
stance after extended driving.
▷ Emergency call.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Operation of the tailgate.
▷ Glass sunroof.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent, for in‐
stance if the installation is terminated.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
▷ Close the windows.
▷ Close the glass sunroof.
▷ Close the trunk lid.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services, such as RTTI or Remote Serv‐
ices, will be reactivated automatically during the
next trip.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as
a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐
cle for the consent for installation.
After an extended stationary period, charge the
vehicle battery with an extended drive.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷ Remove connected devices from the OBD
socket.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the control display or in the BMW app.
Starting installation
The upgrade can be installed when all prerequi‐
sites have been met.
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
1. "CAR"
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
After a software update in the
vehicle
After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐
mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's
Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐
formation.
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
General settings
CONTROLS
General settings
Setting the time format
1. "CAR"
Vehicle features and
options
2. "Settings"
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time format:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Time
1. "CAR"
Setting the time zone
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Automatic time setting"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
Date
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the date
1. "CAR"
Setting the time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date:"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
8. Make the settings for the month and year.
9. "OK"
7. Press the Controller.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
9. "OK"
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
General settings
CONTROLS
data to analyze the attention of the driver. This
system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐
tems, e.g.:
Setting the date format
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ Fatigue alert.
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date format:"
▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with Ex‐
tended Traffic Jam Assistant.
Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
Language
3. "General settings"
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the system language
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses.
Setting the units of
measurement
Trip data settings
Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐
ture.
Principle
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset
can be configured.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Resetting trip data
1. "CAR"
3. "General settings"
4. "Units"
2. "Settings"
5. Select the desired menu item.
6. Select the desired setting.
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset trip data"
5. Select the desired setting.
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
A camera that monitors driver activity is located
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates
the head position and eye opening and uses the
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
General settings
CONTROLS
Speed warning
Activating/deactivating
pop-ups
Principle
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐
matically on the Control Display. Some of these
pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
1. "CAR"
General information
2. "Settings"
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
3. "General settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting
1. "CAR"
Control Display
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Warning at:"
Brightness
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Press the Controller.
7. Press the Controller.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
2. "Settings"
8. Press the Controller.
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Speed warning"
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Accept current speed as the
speed warning
1. "CAR"
Reset vehicle data
All individual settings can be reset to the factory
settings when the drive-ready state is switched
off.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Select current speed"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
General settings
CONTROLS
When the stored settings in a driver profile are
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive
account.
3. Select desired notifications.
4. Press the button.
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings
Notifications
It is possible to set which notifications are per‐
mitted and which notifications will be displayed at
the start of the trip and at the completion of the
trip.
Principle
The menu centrally displays all notifications arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in form of a list.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
General information
The following notifications can be displayed:
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
▷ Traffic messages.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Messages on service notifications.
Display, notifications
General information
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants allows
the configuration of the range of messages that
will be displayed. Depending on the situation, the
desired condition can be activated.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Messages, for instance from the BMW app.
▷ Messages from the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle, for instance technical information or im‐
portant customer information.
The number of notifications is additionally dis‐
played in the status field.
Condition
Description
"Do not
disturb"
Incoming calls and non-critical
notifications are not displayed.
Go to notifications
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
Icon is shown in the status
information with the number of
messages.
3. Select desired notification.
"Passenger
on board"
Private contents, such as mes‐
sages, will not be displayed di‐
rectly.
Delete notifications
All notifications, except Check Control messages
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
be deleted from the list.
Icon is shown in the status
information with the number of
messages.
Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Activate/deactivate
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
General settings
CONTROLS
4. "Notification display"
5. Select the desired setting.
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Personal settings
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Vehicle features and
options
Principle
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following data
is deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
Data protection
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and trip computer information.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
Data transmission
Principle
The vehicle offers different services, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transmission can be deactivated
for some services.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
▷ Login accounts.
▷ Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive account.
General information
When the data transmission is deactivated, the
respective service cannot be used.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Only make these settings while stationary.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Settings
Deleting data
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
1. "CAR"
Additional information:
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Personal settings
CONTROLS
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐
ited period of time.
Driver profiles
As soon as the engine is started or any button is
pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Principle
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
the driver profile.
Setup assistant
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen
to configure the most important settings for the
vehicle.
"Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐
tant.
General information
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at
any time.
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐
lected.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
profile.
3. "General settings"
4. "Getting started"
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
lowing functions:
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver when
it is unlocked. For this purpose, the recognition
via a vehicle key or a digital key must be as‐
signed to a driver profile.
▷ Setting the system language.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is
thereby possible to use these settings in other
BMW vehicles as well.
If the set-up assistant was opened in the
guest profile: create driver profile.
▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐
ready defined driver profile: set up personal
assistant.
Functional requirements
When a driver profile is created, switched or de‐
leted, the vehicle must move at a maximum of
walking speed.
▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant
was opened from an already defined driver
profile or a guest profile: set up services or
confirm the explanation for the transmission
of vehicle related data.
Welcome screen
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐
come screen will be displayed.
▷ Set up other methods for use.
The selected settings are stored in the active
driver's profile.
The following actions can be carried out on the
Welcome screen:
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
▷ Switching the driver profile.
▷ Starting the set-up assistant.
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Personal settings
CONTROLS
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐
matically active:
Scanning the displayed QR code will accept
the access data for the ConnectedDrive ac‐
count from the BMW app.
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.
▷ "Log in"
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐
hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The access data must be entered via iDrive.
▷ "New registration"
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐
cle.
Scan the displayed QR code and follow the
instructions on the smartphone.
The following limitations apply:
Selecting recognition
1. "CAR"
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to
the guest profile.
2. "Driver profiles"
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest
profile.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count.
4. "Driver recognition"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "with vehicle key"
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
The vehicle key that is recognized in the
car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected,
the unintended vehicle keys must be re‐
moved from the car’s interior.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
▷ "With Digital Key"
3. "Guest"
4. "OK"
The digital key that is recognized in the
car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
file. If multiple digital keys are detected,
the unintended digital keys must be re‐
moved from the car’s interior.
Creating a driver profile
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
6. "Activate linkage"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As soon as the vehicle detects the vehicle key or
the digital key, the corresponding driver profile
will be activated. If the vehicle key or the smart‐
phone with the digital key is not carried with you
or not recognized, the driver profile can only be
selected on the Welcome screen when a PIN has
been set up.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Add driver profile"
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be
entered for the driver profile.
ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐
tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver
profile. The following options are available for this
purpose:
Setting up a PIN
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
vated without vehicle key and without digital key.
▷ "Via My BMW app"
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Personal settings
CONTROLS
In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the
driver profile.
The handed over vehicle key can then no longer
be used to access the personal driver profile.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐
ble: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not
known, the driver profile cannot be activated.
Selecting a driver profile
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
profile will be selected automatically.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If
a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the
driver's profile can be activated with the access
data of the corresponding ConnectedDrive ac‐
count.
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive.
A PIN may have to be entered.
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
4. "Driver recognition"
5. "using PIN"
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
are automatically applied.
Changing/canceling the
recognition function
When another vehicle key or another digital key
is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐
ment must be canceled first.
Switching synchronization with
the ConnectedDrive account
on/off
The settings stored in the driver's profile are
synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive
account. This means that it is possible to use the
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with
ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is
supported.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐
ated or via iDrive:
4. "Driver recognition"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "with vehicle key"
▷ "With Digital Key"
6. "Activate linkage"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed
over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐
lowing steps first:
4. "Settings"
5. "Synchronize driver profile"
6. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Setting up PIN.
▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.
▷ Switching to the guest profile.
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Personal settings
CONTROLS
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
count will be retained.
Renaming a driver profile
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
System limits
A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may
not be possible in the following cases, e.g.:
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Settings"
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access.
5. Enter a profile name.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
6.
Select the icon.
ConnectedDrive countries:
▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located in the
outer area on the driver's side of the vehicle.
The name of the driver profile is transferred from
the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for the
profile name must be made in the Connected‐
Drive account.
ConnectedDrive countries:
A driver profile can only be created and
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when the vehicle has cellular network reception.
Selecting a profile picture
1. "CAR"
The use of personal settings that are stored in
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐
tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐
able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
other vehicles.
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Avatar"
5. Select the desired profile picture.
ConnectedDrive countries:
The profile image is transferred from the Con‐
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.
Deleting the driver profile
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Delete now"
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
Connections
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle
Principle
General information
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function.
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
Function
Connection type
Symbol in the
device list
Making calls via the hands-free sys‐
tem.
Bluetooth.
Using phone functions via iDrive or
touchscreen.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or SMS.
Playing music from the smartphone or Bluetooth audio.
the audio player.
WLAN in the vehicle:
WLAN.
WLAN.
WLAN.
Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot:
Using the vehicle Internet access.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the smartphone display on
the Control Display.
USB port:
USB.
Playing music or videos from a USB
device.
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
Function
Connection type
Symbol in the
device list
Apple CarPlay:
Bluetooth and WLAN.
Bluetooth and WLAN.
Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐
eration.
Android Auto:
Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐
eration.
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ WLAN.
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
on and connected to the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety information
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
standby state is switched on.
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
cle and can be used via iDrive.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
sary, for instance authorization; see the oper‐
ating instructions of the device.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐
cle are displayed in the device list.
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
A maximum of four devices can be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of ten
devices can be connected to the vehicle via
WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices will be de‐
tected.
functions may be deactivated on a device
already connected.
▷ "Disconnect device"
The device remains paired and can be
connected again.
1. "COM"
▷ "Delete device"
2. "Mobile devices"
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list.
An icon to the right of the device name indicates,
for which function the device is used.
▷ "Connection mode"
When the icon is displayed in white, this function
is actively connected to the vehicle. The icon is
displayed in gray when the function of the device
is inactive.
Select a connection mode, for instance
Apple CarPlay.
▷ "Telephone"
Set telephone.
Icon Meaning
Telephone.
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
Playback of music files on external devi‐
ces such as audio devices or mobile
phones via Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth audio.
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot.
Apps.
▷ "Apps"
With the installed BMW app, apps from
the smartphone can be displayed in the
vehicle.
Screen Mirroring.
Apple CarPlay.
▷ "Wi-Fi®"
Connects the device with the WLAN in
the vehicle.
Android Auto.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Priority of the phones
When multiple mobile phones are connected to
the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the
mobile phones for reconnection.
The scope of functions depends on the mobile
device.
1. "COM"
Follow the information on the Control Display.
2. "Mobile devices"
1. "COM"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select the desired device.
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Connect device"
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.
The functions that were assigned to the
device before disconnecting are assigned
to the device when it is reconnected. The
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
Frequently Asked Questions
Bluetooth connection
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the
vehicle.
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and
on the device.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the
Control Display.
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new
device search.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the operat‐
ing instructions of the device.
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
function are paired.
Activate Bluetooth
1. "COM"
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the
power-save mode where required.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
function anymore.
5. "Bluetooth®"
6. Select setting.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
mobile phone operation.
Connecting the device
1. "COM"
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
Why can telephone functions not be used via
iDrive?
5. "Phone calls and audio"
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
mobile phone.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone function.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
Why are no or not all telephone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
▷ Transmission of the telephone book entries is
not yet complete.
WLAN connection
▷ It is possible that only the telephone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
General information
For certain applications, such as apps, the data
exchange between smartphone and vehicle oc‐
curs via WLAN.
▷ It may not be possible to display telephone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
Functional requirements
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high.
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
terface.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
memos.
Activate WLAN in the vehicle
1. "COM"
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone function.
5. "Wi-Fi®"
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the
phone after the last synchronization.
Wi-Fi hotspot
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload
contacts"
Principle
Compatible devices with WLAN interface can
use the Internet connection of the vehicle via the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
How can the telephone connection quality be
improved?
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile
phone.
General information
Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-
Fi hotspot simultaneously.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
rately in the sound settings.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
terface.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact
Customer Relations, a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷ Registration and data contract with a service
provider where required.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Connecting a device to the
Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot
5. "Internet connection"
6. Select the desired setting.
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi-
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a
data volume purchase from a service provider.
Depending on the country version, data volume
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Screen Mirroring
General information
1. "COM"
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
play.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Internet, apps"
Functional requirements
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐
ing interface.
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐
sary.
▷ Screen Mirroring is activated on the smart‐
phone.
"Open settings"
7. Activate Internet usage.
"Internet connection"
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
Pairing a smartphone with
Screen Mirroring
1. "COM"
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile de‐
vice. Select network name on the device.
2. "Mobile devices"
10.Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
The device is displayed in the device list.
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐
spot.
5. "Screen Mirroring"
The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display.
6. Search for WLAN devices in the surrounding
area of the smartphone.
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
data volume.
The WLAN name of the vehicle appears on
the device display. Select the WLAN name of
the vehicle.
Deactivating Internet usage via
the Wi-Fi hotspot
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Apple CarPlay©
preparation
Principle
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control
and iDrive.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
iOS 7.1 or later.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is set up, Car‐
Play can no longer be selected.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
list.
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice control are
activated on the iPhone.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored connections under
Bluetooth and under WLAN.
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must
be activated on the iPhone.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐
phone integration.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact
Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐
cle.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
Android Auto© preparation
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
Principle
5. "Phone calls and audio"
Android Auto allows the operation of certain
functions of a compatible smartphone via voice
control and iDrive.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
General information
The range of services offered depends on the
country.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or an
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
Android smartphone with Android 11, regard‐
less of the manufacturer.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the
smartphone.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The smartphone has already been paired with
Android Auto. When a new connection is set up,
Android Auto can no longer be selected.
▷ The smartphone must support a 5 Ghz WiFi
connection.
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must
be activated on the smartphone.
▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the
device list.
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐
cle.
▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored connections
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
Pairing a smartphone with
Android Auto
▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact
Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Phone calls and audio"
USB connection
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
General information
The following mobile devices can be connected
to the USB port:
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
▷ Mobile phones.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and
exFAT are the recommended formats.
8. "Use Android Auto"
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile
device.
A connected USB device will be supplied with
charge current via the USB port if the device
supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐
rent of the USB port.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
The following uses are possible on USB ports
with data transmission:
Operation
▷ Playing music files.
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷ Playing videos.
Follow the following when connecting:
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Connections
CONTROLS
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB port.
Additional information:
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every device is operable on the ve‐
hicle.
▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the operating instructions
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in
all cases.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐
board socket, when it is connected to the
USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, settings may be required on the USB
storage device, refer to the operating instruc‐
tions of the device.
Not compatible USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device with USB port.
Additional information:
Connecting the device
Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter
cable to a USB port.
The USB device is displayed in the device list.
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Bat‐
teries or button cells can be swallowed and
lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours,
for example, due to internal burns or chemical
burns. There is an injury hazard or danger to
life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of
reach for children. Immediately seek medical
help if there is any suspicion that a battery or
button cell has been swallowed or is located in
any part of the body.
Vehicle key
Warning
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the scope
of delivery includes two vehicle keys or one vehi‐
cle key and the BMW display key.
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery.
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐
sion, various settings can be configured for the
button functions.
Warning
A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐
signed to a vehicle key.
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
To provide information on maintenance recom‐
mendations, the service data is stored in the ve‐
hicle key.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key,
take the vehicle key with you when exiting the
vehicle.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked
when the button is pressed for the first time.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
vehicle is being unlocked.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Overview
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle
access points.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle
key, this driver profile will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
1
2
Unlocking
Locking
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Startꢀꢁ283
3
4
Opening the trunk lid
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched off.
Panic mode, pathway lighting
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched off.
Unlocking
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
is ready for operation.
General information
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐
ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐
tings:
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
protection are opened, as long as the button on
the vehicle key is pressed.
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Locking
With Comfort Access:
convenient closing
General information
Safety information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking using
the vehicle key depends on the following set‐
tings:
Warning
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
warning flashers are switched on.
Closing
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
key in the area close to the vehicle after
locking.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
protection are closed, as long as the button on
the vehicle key is pressed.
2.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
flashers are switched on.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock buttons
or the door openers.
Switching on the interior and
exterior lighting
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched on.
Press the button on the vehicle key with
the vehicle locked.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
onds after locking.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Depending on the settings, parts of the exte‐
rior lighting will be switched on.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Trunk lid
Replacing the battery
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
NOTICE
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can dam‐
age the vehicle key. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage. Al‐
ways replace the discharged battery with a bat‐
tery with the same voltage, the same size and
the same specification.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion P must be engaged to open the trunk lid
with the vehicle key.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Safety information
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a
pointed object and lift it out.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Switching pathway lighting on
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
cle key for approx. 1 second.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the
positive side facing up.
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path‐
way lighting feature.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
until the integrated key engages.
Additional information:
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
them to a collection point.
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the tray for wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
Additional vehicle keys
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key.
Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Additional information:
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and replaced
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Switching the drive-ready state on
via emergency detection of the
vehicle key
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐
file, the connection to this vehicle key must be
deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned
to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
Proceed as follows in this case:
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐
ers or other equipment with high transmitting
power.
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
jects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
metal objects.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or
other electronic devices in direct proximity to
the vehicle key.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
change the position of the vehicle key and repeat
the procedure.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity
to other electronic devices.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐
hicle key?
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ices of the BMW app include the ability to
lock and unlock a vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW app must be in‐
stalled on a smartphone.
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
Warning
BMW display key
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
General information
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Thescope of delivery of the BMW display key in‐
cludes an additional mechanical key. If the dis‐
play key is used, the mechanical key should be
carried with you, for instance in the wallet. The
mechanical key is used like the integrated key.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard vehicle key.
Warning
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐
able:
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the alarm system.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-car
heating.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Without parked-car heating: operate pre-ven‐
tilation.
▷ Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine
Start
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
▷ Remote Control Parking.
Additional information:
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Overview
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status line,
the information area, and the lower status line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following infor‐
mation:
▷
/
Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured.
1
2
3
Opening the trunk lid
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
Unlocking
▷
Charge state of the display key battery.
Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Information area
Press briefly: pathway lighting
Locking
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
4
5
6
7
8
9
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
Park button
Display
Back
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
Turn the display on/off
Micro-USB charging interface
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
between the pages.
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate icon.
To return to the original page:
icon beneath the display.
tap on the
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐
ble.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range.
▷ The status information can be called up in the
extended reception range.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
tion range.
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐
ing can be operated.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
ception range. It indicates when the last data
transfer from the vehicle took place.
Without parked-car heating: the pre-ventila‐
tion can be operated.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle,
you can display the last transmitted status in‐
formation from the vehicle.
Turning on/off
The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
The icon is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Hiding the display on the display manually: press
the button on the left side of the display key.
Main menu
Information/Function
"Preconditioning
setting"
With parked-car heating:
operate parked-car heat‐
ing.
To show the display:
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
Without parked-car heat‐
ing: operate pre-ventila‐
tion.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
To turn off the display to increase the usable bat‐
tery life:
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine
Start.
1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
"R/C parking"
Remote Control Parking.
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
Display key battery
3. "OK"
To turn the display on:
General information
Follow the following information:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
declines, the display is switched off automati‐
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
Operating concept
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
up to five main menus providing access to the
sub-menus.
Main menu
Information/Function
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐
tended period.
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully
discharged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
After alarm triggering:
date, time, and reason for
triggering the alarm.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging time depends on the charger
used.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of
Condition Based Service
CBS.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Status of the roadside
parking lights.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
heat up the tray and the display key.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
through the display key may be reduced, and
"Mobility info"
Range with available fuel.
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
in isolated cases the charge process may be
interrupted temporarily.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
less charging tray, make sure there are no
objects between it and the wireless charging
tray.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue
The display key is charging.
Safety information
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Warning
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
transmission, between the device and the tray
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. When
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
no objects between the device and the tray.
Orange The display key is not charging.
Temperature on the display key pos‐
sibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
Red
The display key is not charging.
Contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Malfunction
Charging
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Via USB
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging interface to a USB port.
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
In the center console
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐
ers or other equipment with high transmitting
power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
jects.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or
other electronic devices in direct proximity.
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
1. Open the tray cover.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the
wireless charging tray in front of the cup hold‐
ers.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Turning on drive readiness via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
Key Card
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version, the
Key Card may not be available.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The digi‐
tal key must be activated via iDrive.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because the
active Key Card can be used to start the vehicle.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a service
appointment.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the display key with its rear against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
2. If the display key is detected:
Safety information
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly change
the position of the display key and repeat the
procedure.
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be turned on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐
play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds
until the display is switched off and then on
again:
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
▷
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
▷
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Warning
Activate Key Card
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
2. Place Key Card centered into the smart‐
phone tray.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to activate the Key Card.
Deactivate Key Card
1. "CAR"
Connection to the vehicle
2. "Settings"
The communication between the vehicle and the
Key Card uses near field communication, NFC.
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Digital Key"
5. Select Key Card.
6. "Key active"
Activating/deactivating Key Card
in the vehicle
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
General information
The Key Card must be located in the smart‐
phone tray and a vehicle key must be located in
the vehicle to activate the Key Card.
Unlocking and locking the
vehicle
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
deactivate the Key Card.
When BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehi‐
cle, a digital key can be used instead of the vehi‐
cle key.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Hold activated Key Card directly and centered on
the external door handle of the driver's door.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the pro‐
cedure.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible
smartphone or other compatible mobile termi‐
nals, such as a Smartwatch.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by the
smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app pro‐
vides a check to determine if the smartphone
and the vehicle are compatible.
Starting the engine
A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐
signed to a digital key.
Additional information:
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al‐
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you. This ensures access to the vehi‐
cle, even in the event of a smartphone failure. It
is also useful to carry the vehicle key or the Key
Card with you if the vehicle has to be handed
over to another person. You can then hand over
the vehicle key or the Key Card, instead of your
smartphone. Always take the vehicle key with
you to a service appointment.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place activated Key Card centered into the
smartphone tray.
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐
gine.
With wireless charging tray: After starting the en‐
gine, take the Key Card out of the tray to make
tray available for charging compatible smart‐
phones.
Safety information
Malfunction
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen‐
sors and the Key Card, for instance a wallet.
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.
BMW Digital Key
Principle
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
General information
The availability of the BMW Digital Key depends
on the equipment and national-market version.
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Warning
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be located in
the vehicle to be enabled.
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu in
the BMW app or on the Control Display.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
The valid service period of the digital key may be
limited. The expiration date of the validity can be
checked in the BMW app.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
After a digital key has expired, it can still be used
to move the vehicle until the vehicle is used with
a different vehicle key or digital key.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Sharing digital keys
General information
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys with
other people. This option is available via the
smartphone that is enabled as digital remote
control key.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Connection to the vehicle
The communication between the vehicle and the
smartphone uses near field communication,
NFC.
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond‐
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
Functional requirements
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
Limiting the range of functions
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐
mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐
pends on the smartphone.
Certain functions of the digital key can be limited
before handing it over. For example, if the digital
key is handed over to a novice driver, the switch-
off of driving stability control system can be ex‐
cluded. For more information, refer to the Con‐
nectedDrive portal and the BMW app.
Enable the digital remote control
key
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a digi‐
tal remote control key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the vehi‐
cle for this purpose.
Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone model,
an authentication may be required for security
and safety reasons.
An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote
control key or another method may be used for
The proof of authorization can be started via the
BMW app or via the activation code in the corre‐
sponding smartphone function, for instance the
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
authentication. Follow the corresponding instruc‐
tions on the smartphone or the Control Display.
The digital remote control key must be enabled
again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1. "CAR"
Deleting a shared key
General information
Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone
with the digital remote control key, the smart‐
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Reset function"
The deletion via the smartphone with the digital
remote control key will not be performed until
the vehicle is used with a key other than the key
to be deleted.
Unlocking and locking the
vehicle
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the list
of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deletion via iDrive
Hold the near field communication antenna of
the smartphone directly and centered on the ex‐
ternal door handle of the driver's door.
To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an
authorized vehicle key must be located in the ve‐
hicle or the remote control key must be located
in the smartphone tray.
The position of the near field communication an‐
tenna depends on the smartphone model.
1. "CAR"
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors including the trunk lid
are closed.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. "Delete key"
Starting the engine
Reset the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au‐
thorized vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐
cle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all
digital keys including the digital remote control
key will be deleted.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐
locked, locked or started with a digital key.
2. Place smartphone centered into the smart‐
phone tray.
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Ensure that the display is facing up.
Safety information
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐
gine.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Sale of the smartphone
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to
selling the smartphone. This ensures that that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key
function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐
tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty, among other potential damage. Remove
the integrated key before pulling the external
door handle.
When the vehicle is removed from the Connec‐
tedDrive account, all digital keys for the vehicle
will be deleted.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors
in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is
not suitable.
Removing
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and the
smartphone cover.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key also fits the glove compartment.
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
Alarm system
The activated alarm system is triggered when
the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐
locked via the door lock.
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
back under the cover and push the cover out.
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent
the cover from falling out of the door handle.
Overview
3. Remove the cover.
Buttons for the central locking system.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Press the button.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening
Functional requirements
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
Unlocking
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via
the Comfort Access depends on the following
settings:
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
Comfort Access
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
vehicle is being unlocked.
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
Unlocking the vehicle
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key
when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐
rior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
door handle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle
key, this driver profile will be activated and the
settings that are stored in it will be applied.
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
cle.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
BMW Digital Key.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
▷ Opening trunk lid.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the car's interior, they will not be
folded out when unlocking.
▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-
touch activation.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
Convenient closing
Safety information
tion is switched off.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched off.
Warning
Locking
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
tings:
Closing
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior
mirrors are not folded in when the hazard
warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
Locking the vehicle
Close the driver's door.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
flashers are switched on.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
Opening the trunk lid
General information
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock buttons
or the door openers.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be
switched on.
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Safety information
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Warning
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion P must be engaged for touchless opening of
the trunk lid.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the trunk
lid may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐
tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement
is detected.
NOTICE
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Contactless opening and closing of the trunk lid
must be activated in the settings.
Opening
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Press the button on the outer side of the trunk
lid.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
Opening and closing the trunk lid
with no-touch activation
Principle
The trunk lid can be opened with no-touch acti‐
vation using the vehicle key you are carrying.
With automatic tailgate operation, it can also be
closed with no-touch activation. Two sensors
detect a forward-directed foot motion in the cen‐
tral rear area and the trunk lid is opened or
closed.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
re-open the trunk lid.
Settings
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate
can be switched on or off.
1. "CAR"
System limits
2. "Settings"
The detection of the foot movement may be lim‐
ited due to the following external conditions:
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Tailgate"
▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
Performing the foot movement
Movement in the range of the sensors may
cause unintended opening or closing of the
cargo area, for instance due to water running
own when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy
rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening or
closing of the cargo area in such cases, keep the
vehicle key at a sufficient distance from the rear
of the vehicle.
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear
end.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
direction and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Touchless unlocking and locking
of the vehicle
Principle
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning
system flashes.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.
With automatic tailgate: Moving your foot again
will stop the opening motion, and moving it one
more time after that will close the trunk lid.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
Closing
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.
The trunk lid can only be closed with no-touch
activation if automatic tailgate operation is active.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone
for an extended period of time without move‐
ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically.
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger
seat during locking and the safety belt of the
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt
buckle during locking:
Locking after Remote Control
Parking
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
In the following situations, lock the vehicle with
the vehicle key:
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ After Remote Control Parking.
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐
locking/locking depends on the following set‐
tings:
▷ After the initial trip, after the vehicle was man‐
euvered out of the parking space with Re‐
mote Control Parking.
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.
▷ If the automatic locking is active.
Malfunction
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐
function under the following circumstances:
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
cle on the driver's side.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐
ers or other equipment with high transmitting
power.
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐
locked regardless of the side on which the
driver approaches the vehicle.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐
jects.
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐
nal.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
metal objects.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or
other electronic devices in direct proximity to
the vehicle key.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the
vehicle is being unlocked.
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity
to other electronic devices.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request detection on the door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or
use the integrated key.
Functional requirements
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,
the doors and trunk lid must be closed.
Additional information:
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed.
Trunk lid
▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐
ond vehicle key can be located in a radius of
six meters around the vehicle.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, touchless unlocking/locking is
not possible until after the vehicle has been
driven.
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
Without automatic tailgate
operation: opening and closing
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.
Opening from the outside
With automatic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion P must be engaged to open the trunk lid
with the vehicle key.
It may not be possible to open the trunk lid when
the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Additional information:
Safety information
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
on the outer side of the trunk lid.
Warning
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the outer
side of the trunk lid.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
▷
Press and hold the button on the ve‐
hicle key for approx. 1 second.
When unlocking with the vehicle key, the
doors may also be unlocked.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
Open from inside
Press the button in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
Closing
Grasp the recess grips and pull the trunk lid
down.
With Comfort Access: With the driver’s
door closed, press the button on the in‐
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
side of the trunk lid to lock an unlocked vehicle
before closing the trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐
er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐
ing motion.
With automatic tailgate
operation: opening and closing
Opening
Closing
From the outside
From the outside
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
With Comfort Access:
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐
side of the vehicle in the area of the trunk lid.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
on the outer side of the trunk lid.
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the outer
side of the trunk lid.
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the storage
compartmenr of the driver's door.
▷
Press and hold the button on the ve‐
hicle key for approx. 1 second.
The vehicle key must be located inside the vehi‐
cle for this function.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid is
closed.
From the inside
Press the button in the storage compart‐
Interruption of the closing procedure
ment of the driver's door.
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening operation is interrupted:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of
the trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the
trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of
the trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk
lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐
ing motion.
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Malfunction
Valet parking mode
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Principle
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is
disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer
possible.
Trunk emergency unlocking
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is
handed over for valet parking.
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal pro‐
files cannot be changed. Personal data cannot
be displayed.
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
Soft-close automatic
function
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can
be locked and disconnected from the central
locking system.
Safety information
Functional requirements
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed while operating the
doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐
ing opening and closing.
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned
ConnectedDrive account.
Accessing the menu for the valet
parking mode
Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
Via the switch-off screen
Closing occurs automatically.
After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.
Via the display bar at the upper edge
of the Control Display
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Valet parking mode"
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
Via the vehicle settings
1. "CAR"
4. "Activate now"
2. "Settings"
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐
file.
3. "General settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
Activating the valet parking
mode
Deactivating valet parking mode
General information
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
General information
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet
parking mode at a future time.
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
lock screen.
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐
pending on the active driver profile.
Driver profile with PIN
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐
file.
Regardless of which driver activated the valet
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
1. "Lock tailgate as well"
1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
must be deactivated by entering the assigned
ConnectedDrive access data.
2. "Activate now"
Driver profile without PIN
Driver profile without PIN
The valet parking mode was activated by another
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data
for his ConnectedDrive account.
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
3. "Lock tailgate as well"
4. "Activate linkage"
5. "Activate now"
1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐
signed to the driver profile.
Guest profile
The guest profile is the active driver profile.
A PIN must be entered.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
3. "Lock tailgate as well"
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
Guest profile
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals:
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
activated in the guest profile.
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"
Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice,
locking by blinking once.
1. Select guest profile.
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐
vation.
▷ With alarm system:
"Sound when locking/unlocking"
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
profile.
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Settings
Folding mirrors in automatically
1. "CAR"
General information
2. "Settings"
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
These settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic unlocking
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Unlocking and locking
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. Select the desired setting:
Doors
1. "CAR"
5.
▷ "Unlock doors when in Park"
▷ "Unlock at end of trip"
2. "Settings"
3. "Key button settings"
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
4.
Select the icon.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Automatic locking
1. "CAR"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Lock in a few minutes"
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
The vehicle locks automatically after a while if
no door is opened after unlocking.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Trunk lid
Establishing idle state after
opening the front doors
Trunk lid and doors
1. "CAR"
You can set up if only the trunk lid will be un‐
locked or if the doors will also be unlocked when
the trunk lid is unlocked
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Alarm system
3. "Key button settings"
General information
4.
Select the icon.
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
The text next to the icon indicates the current
setting.
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐
ing the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, the trunk
lid will be unlocked or opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
Depending on the equipment, the trunk
lid will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐
nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-
Diagnosis.
▷ "Tailgate opens only when vehicle is
unlocked."
The vehicle must be unlocked before the
trunk lid can be used with the vehicle key.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
▷ Acoustic alarm:
The operation of the trunk lid via the vehi‐
cle key is disabled.
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
Comfort Access
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system and
headlights, where required.
Touchless locking and unlocking
Contactless locking and unlocking can be
switched on or off.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
1. "CAR"
Turning on/off
2. "Settings"
The alarm system is switched on or off as soon
as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or
unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Comfort access"
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
When the still open access points are closed,
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐
sor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Opening the trunk lid with the
alarm system switched on
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Indicator light on the interior
mirror
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
The alarm system is switched on.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Safety information
Press the button on the vehicle key within
10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Overview
Ending the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐
gency detection of the vehicle key.
▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐
senger door handle completely.
Power windows
Safety switch
Power windows
General information
The windows can be opened with the vehicle
key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐
fort Access.
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the follow‐
ing conditions.
With Comfort Access: The windows can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
When a window is often opened in the same po‐
sition, this task can be performed by the BMW
Intelligent Personal Assistant. For instance when
the same parking garage is frequently used.
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
Additional information:
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold
it there.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window closes without jam protection.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Safety switch
Principle
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐
dren, for instance from opening and closing the
rear windows using the switches in the rear.
Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
General information
Turning on/off
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
terrupted.
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety information
Rear window roller
sunblind
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
movement of the windows.
Safety information
NOTICE
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
When operating the roller sunblind, objects
stored on the rear shelf may damage the roller
sunblind. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure that
the area of movement of the roller sunblind is
clear during the operation.
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Overview
Roller sunblinds, rear side
windows
Safety information
Warning
With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,
the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐
ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be
harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open
the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds
are closed.
Button for the roller sunblind.
Operation
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open roller
sunblind.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it
onto the bracket.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
erated using the same switch.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind after having activated it consecutively a
number of times, the overheating protection
mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐
side with the vehicle key and also closed with
Comfort Access.
With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be
closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low inte‐
rior temperatures.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Overview
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
separately
▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
Opening/closing the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch is
being held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐
tection closes.
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
together
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
▷ Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and sun
protection are opening to‐
gether.
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐
sion toward the front past the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
The glass sunroof and sun protection are
closing together.
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing path is clear.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
this comfort position.
Closing from the lifted position
without jam protection
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the roof
and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐
ing.
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power
interruption
General information
If a resistance or blockage is detected while the
glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
position, or it is stopped when closing from the
tilted position.
General information
After a power interruption during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent. Initializing the sys‐
tem can help in this case.
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions:
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initiali‐
zation is completed.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The outside temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and
options
Seats
Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex‐
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle control
could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only
adjust the seat on the driver's side when the
vehicle is stationary.
Warning
Sitting safely
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
protective effect of the safety belt can no lon‐
ger be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under
the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to
starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is
in the most upright position as possible and do
not adjust again while driving.
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐
tion plays an important role. Follow the informa‐
tion in the following chapters.
Additional information:
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the driver profile currently used. When a driver
profile is selected, the stored position is called up
automatically.
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Height
Overview
Press switch up or down.
Seat tilt
1
2
3
4
5
6
Thigh support
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Upper backrest
Backrest width
Lumbar support
Backrest tilt, head restraint
Longitudinal direction
Tilt switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Press switch forward or backward.
Tilt switch forward or backward.
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the
side sections of the backrest.
Push the switch in the front or back.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Sport seat
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width increases.
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest
Principle
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a re‐
laxed seat position and reduces strain on the
shoulder muscles.
Lumbar support
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright sitting position.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not
allow more than one person to wear a single
safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed
on an occupant's lap, but must be transported
and secured in designated child restraint sys‐
tems.
▷ Press the front section of the button:
The upper backrest is inclined forward.
▷ Press the rear section of the button:
The upper backrest is inclined backward.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Make sure that all occu‐
pants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Safety belts
General information
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
unfold their protective effect when adjusted cor‐
rectly.
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
tional safety device. The airbags do not replace
safety belts.
Warning
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the middle safety belt is not
guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
All belt fastening points are designed to achieve
the best possible protective effect of the safety
belts with proper use of the safety belts and cor‐
rect seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, refer to
Warning
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on the
left and right.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
the following situations:
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Seat belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.
Have the safety belts checked after an accident
at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Middle safety belt in the rear
Buckling the safety belt
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
1. Pull the latch plate at the end of the belt out
of the fixture on the rear shelf.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt
lock, arrow 1.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the seat
belt buckle, arrow 2.
The seat belt buckles must engage audibly.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Open the belt lock, arrow 2, with the buckle
tongue, arrow 1.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
front passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
4. Guide the safety belt to the fixture on the rear
shelf.
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Safety belt reminder for driver's
Icon
Description
seat and front passenger seat
Green: the safety belt is buckled
on the corresponding rear seat.
General information
The safety belt reminder is issued when the driv‐
er's safety belt is not buckled.
The safety belt reminder is also active when the
front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob‐
jects are on the front passenger seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buck‐
led on the corresponding rear
seat.
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
passenger unbuckles a safety belt during the trip.
Display in the instrument cluster
Safety mode
In critical driving situations, for instance during
emergency braking, the front safety belts tighten
automatically.
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
If the driving situation passes without an accident
occurring, the belt tension relaxes.
Safety belt reminder for rear
seats
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
General information
The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐
vated each time the engine starts.
Front head restraints
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐
ing the trip.
General information
The current head restraint position can be stored
using the memory function.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐
minates after the engine is started.
Safety information
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
ment version and country variant.
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
Adjusting the height: power head
restraint
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Press switch up or down.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Adjusting the distance: manual
head restraints
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐
straint toward the rear.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Adjusting the distance: power
head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
when the upper backrest is adjusted.
Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it
was exposed to an accident.
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the side extensions
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Removing
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Folding down the center head
restraint
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
To improve the view to the rear, the center head
restraint can be folded to the rear. Only push the
head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the
center seat.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint backward.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the height
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
After the installation, make sure that the head re‐
straint engages correctly.
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When a driver profile is selected,
the stored position is called up automatically.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
using the memory function.
Safety information
Removing
With through-loading system:
Warning
The outer head restraints can be removed. Only
remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting
in the seat in question.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users be‐
hind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in question.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
1
2
3
Adjusting
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
Folding in and out
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting electrically
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
ror are used to control this.
Press the button.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Activating
1.
slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
Folding in and out
2. Engage selector lever position R.
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk
of damage to property, among other potential
damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by
hand or with the button.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
mirror position.
Interior mirror
Press the button.
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On the rear of the mirror.
▷ On narrow roads.
Overview
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐
tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat
position.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is stationary only.
Steering wheel heating
Overview
Electric steering wheel
adjustment
General information
The steering wheel adjustment is stored for the
driver profile currently in use. When a driver pro‐
file is selected, the position is accessed automat‐
ically when the drive-ready state is switched on.
Button for steering wheel heating
The current steering wheel position can be
stored using the memory function.
Turning on/off
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the steering wheel moves temporarily into the
upper position.
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
heating turns on automatically if the function was
turned on at the completion of the last trip.
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Overview
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile.
Storing
1. Set the desired position.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
2.
Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
▷ Lumbar support.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. A signal sounds.
Safety information
Warning
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the driv‐
er's side is interrupted after a short time while
driving.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Massage function
Principle
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
General information
Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷ Hip activation.
Seat heating
▷ Upper-body activation.
▷ Whole body activation.
▷ Back massage.
Overview
Front
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Whole-body exercise.
Overview
Seat heating
Rear
Massage function
Turning on
Press the button once for each intensity
level.
The maximum intensity level is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Seat heating
Turning off
Turning on
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs turn off.
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Adjusting the massage program
1. "CAR"
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, seat heating is switched on auto‐
matically with the temperature selected last.
2. "Settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
When ECO PRO is activated, the heating output
is reduced.
Additional information:
6. Select the desired setting.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
ECO PRO, refer to page 316.
Turning on
Press the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
Turning off
Press and hold the button until the bar
display on the climate control display
goes out.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
The ventilation switches back by one level after a
short time.
Seat heating distribution
The heating effect in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Turning off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs turn off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select desired seat.
Climate control rules
Principle
Depending on the equipment, some heating and
cooling functions can be automatically activated
depending on the outside temperature.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
heating distribution.
Active seat ventilation
General information
The outside temperature at which the functions
are to be automatically activated can be set via
iDrive.
Principle
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
provide a comfortable seat temperature.
Activation is performed if the outside tempera‐
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
in the first few minutes after drive-ready state
has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐
ried out after the settings have been changed.
Overview
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing functions can be automatically activated:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Steering wheel heating
▷ Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐
cally with the levels that were last selected.
Active seat ventilation
Functional requirement
Drive-ready state is switched on.
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired function.
6. Activate the desired rule.
7. Set the level.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and
Warning
options
A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐
sons, especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave per‐
sons, especially children, or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to be‐
come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐
ries when touching the hot components. There
is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐
straint system to direct sunlight or cover where
necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint
system cool down before transporting a child.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
Transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter
than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, or size.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Installing child restraint
systems
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The pro‐
tective effect of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident, braking or
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information of the child restraint
system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐
strained in the event of an accident, braking or
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated.
Do not use child restraint systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident.
If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐
tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐
dent, have these systems checked and re‐
placed by the dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting
or improper installation of the child seat. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure
that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child
in a child restraint system when the airbags are
activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐
vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator light lights up.
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
On the front passenger seat
Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child
in a child restraint system when the airbags are
activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐
vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator light lights up.
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
Additional information:
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is disabled.
Seat position and height
After installing a child restraint system, move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go and,
if possible, bring it up to the highest position.
This seat position and height ensure the best
possible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
If the upper attachment point of the safety belt is
located in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully forward
until the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
LATCH child seat
mountings
Backrest width
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
up a memory position.
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information from the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing
systems.
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Position
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
Icon
Meaning
General information
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Seats equipped with lower
mountings are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
Safety information
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Warning
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower mountings of
standard outer LATCH positions
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
hicle safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the lower mountings are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Warning
The attachment points for child restraint sys‐
tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching
child restraint systems only. When other ob‐
jects are mounted, the attachment points can
be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Attach only child restraint
systems at the corresponding attachment
points.
Assembly of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly engaged.
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Attachment points
Child restraint systems
with tether strap
Safety information
Warning
Icon
Meaning
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on the
rear seat backrest, the rear shelf
or the rear seat.
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the upper retaining strap does not run
over sharp edges and is not twisted as it
passes the upper anchor.
Routing the retaining strap
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that
the rear backrests are locked.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Driving direction
Head restraint
Hook for upper retaining strap
Attachment point
Rear shelf
Warning
The attachment points for child restraint sys‐
tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching
child restraint systems only. When other ob‐
jects are mounted, the attachment points can
be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Attach only child restraint
systems at the corresponding attachment
points.
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining
strap to the attachment point
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports or along both sides of the head re‐
straint to the attachment point.
For the middle seat, guide it over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the attach‐
ment point where applicable.
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
4. Hook the hook of the retaining strap to the at‐
tachment point.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and engage head restraints as
needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door.
This disables various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear.
Additional information:
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and
options
Auto Start/Stop function
Principle
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights.
Drive-ready state remains switched on. The en‐
gine starts automatically for driving off.
Additional information:
Coasting, refer to page 318.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
Start/Stop button
Principle
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
system is automatically activated or deactivated.
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off.
Engine stop
Steptronic transmission: the
drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake pedal while press‐
ing the Start/Stop button.
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby state
is switched back on.
The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
Additional information:
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Driving away
1. Turn on drive readiness.
2. Apply gear position.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Steptronic transmission: manual
engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automatically
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from
the current pedal position.
▷ The outside temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
cooled to the required level.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the
engine switches off.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
General information
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for an
automatic engine start.
▷ Hood is unlocked.
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion in N or R.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
Total time with switched-off engine
ECO PRO driving mode: depend‐
ing on the vehicle equipment, the
total time that the engine has
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
ing preconditions:
been switched off using the Auto
Start/Stop function is displayed
on an automatic engine stop.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
The total time can be reset via the trip data.
Additional information:
ECO PRO, refer to page 316.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ When a situation is detected in which the
stopping time is expected to be very short,
the engine is not switched off automatically.
A message appears on the Control Display,
depending on the situation.
▷ Hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
of time.
▷ When a situation is detected in which the ve‐
hicle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐
gine is started automatically.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Activating/deactivating the
system manually
▷ In case of excessive warming of the interior
when air conditioning is turned on.
▷ In case of excessive cooling of the interior
when the heating is turned on.
Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off.
▷ In case of a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is turned
on.
The engine is started during an automatic engine
stop.
▷ In case of a steering operation.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
Without Mild-Hybrid technology: via
button
When changing from gear lever position D to
N or R.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
When changing from gear lever position P to
N, D, or R.
▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat‐
tery.
▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
Press the button.
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
additional functions Auto Start/
Stop
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to
adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive
manner.
Steptronic transmission: via
selector lever position
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
in selector lever position M/S.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
in SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics
Control.
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐
tions:
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
display
Driving Dynamics Control
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
Principle
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
Switching off the vehicle during
an automatic engine stop
General information
The following systems are affected, for instance:
▷ Engine characteristics.
General information
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Adaptive Drive.
Steptronic transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Adaptive M chassis.
▷ Adaptive M Chassis Professional
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected.
When the drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐
lected automatically, depending on the equip‐
ment.
Overview
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
SPORT
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Principle
The selected driving mode is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting
for more agility with an optimized suspension.
Turning on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Driving modes
Button
Driving
mode
Configuration
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
SPORT
INDIVIDUAL
Principle
SPORT
PLUS
In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, individ‐
ual settings can be adjusted to support driving
dynamics properties.
COMFORT
ECO PRO
ADAPTIVE
INDIVIDUAL
Configuration
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
When the drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se‐
lected automatically, depending on the equip‐
ment.
3. "Driving mode"
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐
tings:
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
SPORT PLUS
Principle
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced set‐
ting between sporty and consumption optimized
driving.
Principle
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted
drive.
Turning on
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Turning on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
ECO PRO
Concept
played in the instrument cluster.
In ECO PRO drive mode, consumption is opti‐
mized.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The last individual configuration is activated di‐
rectly when the driving mode is called up again.
Turning on
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Activating configuration of the drive
mode
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Press the button for the desired drive mode sev‐
eral times.
Principle
In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi‐
vidual settings can be adjusted to support an
economical driving style.
Parking brake
The engine control and comfort features, for in‐
stance the climate control output, are adjusted.
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Configuration
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Safety information
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
ADAPTIVE
▷ Set the parking brake.
Principle
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
The ADAPTIVE driving mode is a balanced driv‐
ing mode that automatically adapts to the driving
situation and driving style.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road
sections are considered.
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
While driving
Warning
General information
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
To use as emergency brake while driving.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and
the brake lights illuminate.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle
is stationary.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Pull the switch briefly to activate the emer‐
gency stop function.
Overview
Additional information:
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Turn on drive readiness.
2.
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or selector
lever position P is set.
Parking brake
The LED and indicator light turn off.
The parking brake is released.
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Automatic release
Pull the switch.
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED lights up.
The LED and indicator light turn off.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
set.
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission:
Automatic Hold
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati‐
cally setting and releasing the brake, such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
is stationary.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling back when driving off.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking brake
is automatically engaged:
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
is stationary.
NOTICE
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐
cle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to
entering the car wash.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Overview
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Automatic Hold
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
The LED goes out.
Establishing operational readiness
of Automatic Hold
1. Turn on drive readiness.
The indicator light goes out.
2.
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every vehicle restart, the last se‐
lected setting is active.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault, se‐
cure the vehicle against rolling before exiting.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
A Check Control message is displayed.
Operational readiness is established and the
driver's door is closed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐
cle.
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is
kept from rolling as soon as the indicator
light illuminates green.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a
power interruption:
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
1. Turn on standby state.
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐
nated.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set
and then push.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is
exited.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Turn signal
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Switching operational readiness off
Press the button.
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
Blinking
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Window wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Safety information
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
Warning
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "One-touch turn signal"
5. Select the desired setting.
Brief blinking
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐
tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to
switching the wipers on.
High beams,
headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
Turn on window wiper system
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Safety information
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Deactivate the rain
sensor in vehicle washes.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When the journey is interrupted with the window
wiper system turned on: when the journey con‐
tinues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
Activate rain sensor
Turn off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
Press the lever up once from its 0 position, ar‐
row 1.
Wiping operation is started.
Press the lever down.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it reaches
the 0 position.
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
Deactivate rain sensor
Press the lever back into the 0 position.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 posi‐
tion when released.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
the rain sensor.
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded
out from the windshield, which is important, for
instance, when changing the wiper blades or for
folding away under frosty conditions.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
Safety information
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property, among other po‐
tential damage. Do not use the washer system
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other poten‐
tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to
switching the wipers on.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Folding out the wipers
Safety information
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
Selector lever positions
Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automati‐
cally.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the wind‐
shield.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever
position N.
Folding down the wipers
Parking position P
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the individ‐
ual wheels in selector lever position P.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
P is engaged automatically
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
Principle
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
gaged.
1. Fasten driver's safety belt.
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
▷ After the standby state has been turned off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐
tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle
may begin to move. Also set parking brake.
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Additional information:
Engaging selector lever
positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear position, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
change from selector lever position P to another
selector lever position.
Engaging selector lever position P
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
Press button P.
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
Sport program M/S
Principle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a car wash, or be pushed.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han‐
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Engaging selector lever position N
Activating the Sport program
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Do not switch standby
state off in car washes.
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
Ending the Sport program
Press the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle can roll.
Manual mode M/S
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
Principle
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐
tor lever position D, arrow 1.
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and road
speeds.
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission
switches back to automatic mode.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when RPM
limits are reached.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull
the left shift paddle.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
Depending on the motorization: if driving mode
SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans‐
mission does not automatically upshift in M/
S manual mode once the maximum speed is
reached.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
Steptronic Sport transmission
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
neously activating kickdown and operating the
left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
term manual mode.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
Additional information:
Ending the manual mode
Press the selector lever to the right.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
Shifting
Without Mild-Hybrid technology:
engage selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank the
engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button
pressed.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.
▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:
keep the left shift paddle pulled.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
Additional information:
General information
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 378.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a hazardous area.
With Mild-Hybrid technology:
engage selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button.
In vehicles with Mild-Hybrid technology and cor‐
responding vehicle battery, the action steps for
unlocking the transmission vary.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Vehicle battery, refer to page 370.
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving
CONTROLS
A Check Control message is displayed.
Start with launch control
1. Turn on drive readiness.
2.
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.
5. Release the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 378.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
Launch Control
Principle
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the
destination flag illuminates.
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry surround‐
ing conditions.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the
destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐
tor pedal is not released.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
Additional information:
After using Launch Control
To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.
Breaking-in period, refer to page 310.
Functional requirement
Launch Control is available when the engine is at
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
least 6 miles/10 km.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐
tion Camera
Vehicle features and
options
Tachometerꢀꢁ162
Selection listsꢀꢁ168
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Widgetsꢀꢁ155
Trip odometer, see Trip dataꢀꢁ168
ECO PRO displaysꢀꢁ316
Power gaugeꢀꢁ162
Status, Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ138
Transmission displayꢀꢁ147
Engine temperatureꢀꢁ164
Outside temperatureꢀꢁ164
Check Controlꢀꢁ156
6
7
8
9
Instrument cluster
Speed Limit Assistantꢀꢁ230
Speed Limit Infoꢀꢁ166
Timeꢀꢁ61
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
possible to deactivate the display change in the
instrument cluster via iDrive.
Central display area
Depending on the equipment and configuration,
the following is displayed in the central display
area of the instrument cluster:
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
Overview
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,
if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐
view with route guidance information.
▷ Displays showing service notifications.
▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the
assist systems is displayed in an animated
surrounding area of the vehicle.
Some displays in the central display area can be
configured individually.
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
ment version and country variant.
1
Fuel gaugeꢀꢁ162
Rangeꢀꢁ164
2
3
Speedometer
Central display areaꢀꢁ153
Navigation display
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Driving mode view
Principle
Safety information
Warning
Depending on the equipment, if the driving mode
view is activated, the displays in the instrument
cluster will adapt to the respective driving mode
when a program is changed via the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
Settings
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Permanent display
1. "CAR"
4. "Driving mode view"
2. "Settings"
Settings
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can
be configured individually.
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Central display area"
6. "Assisted Driving View"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Temporary display
1. "CAR"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Assisted Driving View
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver
Assistance is active"
Principle
Depending on the equipment, information about
the driver assistance systems is displayed in an
animated surrounding area of the vehicle when
driver assistance is active.
Display
General information
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving
View can be displayed permanently or tempora‐
rily with active driving assistance in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Example: the indicator/warning lights for the Ac‐
tive Cruise Control with Stop & Go function ACC
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane
change to the next lane. At the same time, the
lane change to the next lane is shown with ani‐
mation in the Assisted Driving View.
Display
System limits
The system's detection capability is limited. The
system may indicate something wrong.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
Additional information:
G-meter
The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap‐
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on
the vehicle occupants while driving.
Widgets
Efficiency display
Principle
Information about driving style and consumption
can be displayed in the form of a consumption
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for
example.
Principle
Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The following displays can be selected:
▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.
▷ Torque and power.
General information
Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐
ent information will be displayed:
▷ G-Meter.
▷ Trip data.
▷ Efficiency display.
Driving
mode
Display
Selecting
COMFORT
SPORT
Average consumption.
Current consumption.
Energy recovery.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO bonus range.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode.
Current consumption.
Continue to press the button on the turn signal
lever until the desired widget is selected.
Average fuel consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Current consumption
Hiding Check Control messages
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Energy recovery
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy in coast‐
ing overrun mode. The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption can be reduced.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
ECO PRO bonus range
Continuous display
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the fault is
eliminated. If several faults occur at once, the
messages are displayed consecutively.
Check Control
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the moni‐
tored systems.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
cable, in the Head-up Display.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "CAR"
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Display.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control messages"
4. Select the text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Text messages
Red lights
Text messages in combination with an icon in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator/warn‐
ing lights.
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
on the front passenger seat.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as the reason for a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
ther help can be selected.
The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
responding rear seat.
1. "CAR"
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment version and country variant.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control messages"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
Airbag system
Airbag system and seat belt tensioner
may not be working.
Messages after trip completion
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
played again after drive-ready state is switched
off.
Parking brake
Indicator/warning lights
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Principle
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
cle and indicate when a fault is present in the
monitored systems.
Brake system
Brake system impaired. Continue to drive
moderately.
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is switched on.
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Approach control warning with light
braking function
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐
warning. Brake and increase distance.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
signal sounds: braking and evading.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an
evasive maneuver, if necessary.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐
Additional information:
Approach control warning with light braking func‐
Steering Assistant
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
signal sounds: the system will be
switched off.
Intersection collision warning
The indicator light is illuminated: risk of
collision with crossing vehicle.
Additional information:
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Indicator light is illuminated: risk of colli‐
sion with vehicle without detectable driv‐
ing direction or prewarning for vehicles
that cross own driving direction.
Drive power
Reduced drive power due to an over‐
heated drivetrain.
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking.
Additional information:
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross own
driving direction.
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐
sary.
Yellow lights
Additional information:
Steering Assistant
The indicator light lights up and an
acoustic signal may sound: a system in‐
terruption is imminent.
Pedestrian Warning with City
Collision Mitigation
The indicator warning light flashes: lane marking
driven over.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
signal sounds: imminent collision with a
detected person or a cyclist.
Additional information:
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Antilock Braking System ABS
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation,
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
The Brake Assistant function may not
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the
longer braking distance into account.
Tire pressure monitor
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire pres‐
sure or a flat tire. Follow the information
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated
continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses
cannot be detected.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the interference, the system automatically
becomes active again.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
▷ In the case of tires with special approval: the
tire pressure monitor was unable to complete
the reset. Reset the system again.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
Additional information:
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is activated
Additional information:
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 341.
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
Additional information:
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer
Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
Emissions
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
▷ The warning light lights up:
The FTM signals a tire pressure loss in a
tire.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
Additional information:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 348.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 368.
Automatic High Beam Assistant is
switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic situation.
Green lights
Additional information:
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐
sponding rear seat.
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment version and country variant.
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is
stationary.
Turn signal
Additional information:
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Manual Speed Limiter
Additional information:
The indicator light lights up: the system
is switched on.
The indicator light flashes: the set speed
limit has been exceeded.
Parking lights
Additional information:
Parking lights are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
Cruise control
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is active.
Low beams
Additional information:
Low beams are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
Lane departure warning
The indicator light lights up: the system
is activated. Warnings can be issued.
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
The indicator light lights up: the system
is switched on.
Additional information:
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is active.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant
Depending on the equipment, indicator
light illuminates together with the icon for
a cruise control system: Speed Limit As‐
sistant is active and detected speed limits can be
applied manually for the displayed system.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
Additional information:
Indicator light illuminates: the detected
speed limit can be applied with the SET
button. As soon as the speed limit has
been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.
Additional information:
Drive power
Reduced drive power due to a cold drive‐
train.
Steering Assistant
Additional information:
Indicator light lights up: the system sup‐
ports the driver in keeping the vehicle
within the lane.
Gray lights
Additional information:
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is interrupted.
Lane change assistant
Indicator light flashes: the conditions are
not adequate for the system to work or the sys‐
tem has been deactivated.
Gray line for lane marking on the appro‐
priate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur‐
rently possible.
Additional information:
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐
Arrow symbol for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
Steering Assistant
Arrow symbol for lane change gray: lane
change not possible; functional require‐
ments not met.
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is ready.
Additional information:
Additional information:
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is interrupted.
Additional information:
Tachometer
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the
engine.
White lights
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is ready.
Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
Additional information:
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Tachometer"
Fuel gauge
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐
tivated, the activated tachometer is only shown in
the COMFORT or SPORT driving mode.
General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.
Additional information:
Power gauge
Refueling, refer to page 322.
Principle
The display indicates the drive power available as
a percentage of its total power.
Display
An arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol indicates the vehicle side
on which the fuel filler flap is lo‐
cated.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
The current range is displayed as
numerical value.
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Power meter"
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐
tivated, the activated power gauge is only shown
in the COMFORT driving mode.
Shift lights
Principle
The Shift lights in the instrument cluster indicate
the maximum shift point at which the best possi‐
ble acceleration can be achieved.
Display
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version, the Shift lights are active in the M
manual mode of the Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion and with manual transmission.
Functional requirement
▷ Depending on the equipment, either driving
program SPORT or SPORT PLUS is acti‐
vated.
Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when decelerat‐
ing, CHARGE.
Pointer in the area of arrow 2: output in percent,
POWER.
▷ Head-up display is switched off or the display
of the Shift lights in the Head-up display is
deactivated.
Drive power
The available drive power may be reduced due
to certain factors, for instance a cold engine. De‐
pending on the available drive power, the range
for POWER is adjusted automatically.
Turning on/turning off
Steptronic Sport transmission:
1. If applicable, select SPORT or SPORT PLUS
driving mode.
If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a
reduction of the drive power.
Press Driving Dynamics Control.
2. Activate the M manual mode of the transmis‐
sion.
Example
symbol
Description
Reduced drive power due to a
cold drivetrain.
Display
Reduced drive power due to an
overheated drivetrain.
Full Black Panel Display.
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
dle or in the lower half of the
temperature display.
Information about the driving
style
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields
indicate an increase in the speed.
Additional information:
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
indicate the upcoming shift moment.
Coolant level, refer to page 365.
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait
any further to shift.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire
display flashes red and the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted in order to protect the engine.
A red indicator light is displayed.
Outside temperature
Standby state and drive-
ready state
General information
The lettering OFF in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates that drive-
ready state is switched off and
standby state is switched on.
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
The letters READY in the instru‐
ment cluster indicate that the
drive readiness is turned on and
the Auto Start/Stop function is
ready to start the engine automat‐
ically.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Additional information:
Engine oil temperature
Range
Display
Principle
The range indicates the distance that can still be
covered with the current full tank of fuel.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Some information on service notifications can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
General information
The estimated range available with the remaining
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a sporty driv‐
ing style, for instance fast cornering, the engine
function is not always ensured.
Detailed information on service
notifications
More information on the type of service required
may be displayed on the Control Display.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Safety information
3.
"Required services"
Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐
spections are displayed.
NOTICE
With a driving distance of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
Display
The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel
gauge.
The time for recommended mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
Service interval is exceeded.
Service notifications
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Principle
The function displays the service notifications
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
General information
1. "CAR"
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Required services"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice notifications from your vehicle key.
6. Select the desired setting.
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
Gear shift indicator
Principle
The gear shift indicator recommends the most
efficient gear for the current driving situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the naviga‐
tion data and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
General information
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic
signs with speed limitations are detected and
displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering
or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐
played. Speed limits with extra text characters
are always displayed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the
M manual mode of the Steptronic transmission
and with manual transmission.
Steptronic transmission:
displaying
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Safety information
Warning
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Example
Description
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
Additional information:
Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
the Head-up Display.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐
ment cluster or via iDrive.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
where applicable, the Head-up Display
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐
ceeded. The warning that is issued when
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on
the Speed Limit Assistant settings.
Activating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Speed limits"
7. "Show current limit"
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐
eter in the instrument cluster.
System limits
Display
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out after
curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
Depending on the equipment,
Speed Limit Info not available.
▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
outdated or not available.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road layout.
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,
the indicator light will flash.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
Settings
1. "CAR"
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ When the traffic signs do not correspond to
the standard.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel
road are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road signs
or road layouts.
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument cluster and,
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Button
Function
Selection lists
Change the entertainment
source.
Concept
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed
list.
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
Head-up Display.
▷ Entertainment source.
Show list of most recent tele‐
phone calls.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
Turn the thumbwheel to select
the desired setting.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the Control Display.
Press the thumbwheel to con‐
firm the setting.
Display
The list of the current entertain‐
ment source can be displayed
in the instrument cluster again
by turning the thumbwheel.
Trip data
Principle
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐
sumption or trip kilometers, are displayed.
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster.
Displaying and using the list
The lists can be displayed and operated using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling.
Display on the Control Display
Overview
The following information is displayed depending
on the equipment and the set interval and driving
mode:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the
configured interval.
▷ Average speed.
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐
hicle has come to a standstill.
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset after refueling with a larger
quantity of fuel.
Displays
1. "CAR"
▷ "Factory":
Average consumption
since delivery from the factory.
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
The values since the time of the factory
delivery are displayed.
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
manual reset are displayed. The values
can be reset at any time.
Consumption history
The average consumption is shown in the con‐
sumption history in form of a chart based on the
distance traveled and the driving mode.
Resetting average values
manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: "Individual ( )".
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment, information about
the route can be displayed as widget in the in‐
strument cluster.
With the button on the turn signal lever:
The following information is displayed:
▷ Total kilometers.
1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
selected.
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐
ured interval.
▷ Average speed.
Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument
cluster.
Additional information:
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Adjusting the display of the trip
data
The intervals for the display of the trip data in the
instrument cluster and on the Control Display are
adjustable.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since"
5. "Reset individual"
4. "Data since"
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
5. Select the desired setting:
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
been reset, the following interval is automatically
set: "Individual ( )".
Going to the vehicle status
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Sport displays
Information at a glance
Concept
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Symbols
Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the
run-flat tires, refer to page 348.
Display on the Control Display
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐
fer to page 341.
Overview
The following information is displayed:
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
▷ G-Meter.
"Engine oil level": electronic oil
measurement, refer to
page 362.
"Check Control messages": dis‐
playing stored Check Control
▷ Torque.
▷ Power.
"Required services": displaying
service notifications, refer to
Displays
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Sport displays"
Head-up Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
widgets in the instrument cluster.
Principle
The Head-up display projects important informa‐
tion in the driver's field of view, for instance the
speed.
The following widgets can be selected:
▷ Widget for torque and power.
▷ Widget for G meter.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Additional information:
General information
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up
Display.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
Setting the brightness
Overview
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The base setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
Turning on/off
1. "CAR"
7. Press the Controller.
2. "Settings"
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
justed using the instrument lighting.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
Adjusting the height
1. "CAR"
Display
2. "Settings"
Overview
3. "Displays"
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Height"
▷ Vehicle speed.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
reached.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
▷ Sport displays.
7. Press the Controller.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function.
Setting the rotation
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
1. "CAR"
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Rotation"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
7. Press the Controller.
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Displays
CONTROLS
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
Additional settings
1. "CAR"
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being generated.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐
tings for the speed assistant.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
shift Lights in the Head-up Display.
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays
are only displayed in SPORT driving
mode.
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
tinuously displayed in the Head-up
Display.
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐
tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐
formation can be displayed in the lower
section of the Head-up Display.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet road.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the base settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
Lights
Icon
Function
Vehicle features and
options
Low beams.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Lights and lighting
Automatic headlight
control
Switches in the vehicle
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Activating
Switch position:
Icon
Function
Lights off.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot replace
your personal judgment of lighting conditions.
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn the
lights on manually.
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
Welcome lights
Principle
The exterior lighting is switched on automatically
when approaching or unlocking the vehicle.
General information
Position of switch:
,
,
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off after a period of time.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
Parking lights
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
Switching on
1. "CAR"
Position of switch:
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
4. Depending on the equipment, select the fol‐
lowing setting:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
ready state.
▷ "Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
light functions are switched on for a lim‐
ited time.
▷ "Door handle lights"
Low beams
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
Switching on
Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
Pathway lighting
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Principle
For the illumination of the vehicle’s surroundings
after exiting the vehicle, the exterior lighting can
be switched on for a defined period of time.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
parking light can be switched on.
Switching pathway lighting on
After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly
push the turn signal lever forward.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
Setting the duration
1. "CAR"
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment version:
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Pathway lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
6. "OK"
▷ Adaptive Light Control.
▷ Cornering light.
Activating
Switch position:
The adaptive light functions are active when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Daytime driving lights
General information
Switch position:
Adaptive Light Control
▷
,
▷ Depending on the national-market version:
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the laser high beams follow the course
of the road.
The daytime driving lights light up when drive-
ready state is switched on.
Depending on the national-market version: after
switching off the drive-ready state, the parking
Cornering light
lights will illuminate in position
.
Activate/deactivate daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
Principle
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
General information
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐
cable, the use of turn signals.
4. Depending on country specifications:
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
lights, rear"
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Adaptive light functions
Principle
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road.
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti‐
vated when manually switching the high beams
on and off.
Principle
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending on
the traffic situation.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis‐
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
Deactivate Automatic High Beam
Assistant
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, whenever
the traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on by
the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
Activate Automatic High Beam
Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐
sistant can be adjusted.
Switch position:
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; or at animal crossings.
Safety information
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
Functional requirements
▷ Setting at standstill only.
▷ Drive readiness is switched on.
▷ Light is turned off.
Laser high beams
Principle
The headlight range of the high beams is in‐
creased and provides better illumination of the
road.
Increase sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
General information
When the high beams are switched-on, starting
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐
tem responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐
mation can be obtained from the laser label on
the headlight.
Push the turn signal lever to the front again for
approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready
state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐
sistant is reset to the factory settings.
Safety information
System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot re‐
place the driver's personal judgment of when to
use the high beams. In situation that require this,
therefore dimming manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
The label is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Instrument lighting
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The but‐
ton is located in the rear headliner.
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to set the brightness.
Turning reading lights on/off
Setting the brightness
Press the button.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear.
Ambient light
Interior lighting
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
trolled.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
1. "CAR"
Overview
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
Buttons in the vehicle
Turning ambient light on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Interior lights
Reading lights
Selecting the color
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Turning interior lights on/off
3. "Interior lighting"
Press the button.
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Lights
CONTROLS
4. "Color"
Turning speaker lighting on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
hicle is locked.
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
1. "CAR"
Setting the brightness
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Brightness"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
5. "Brightness"
5. Select the desired setting.
Dimmed while driving
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
6. Select the desired setting.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond
Surround Sound System
Principle
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
General information
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be
switched off.
Activating/deactivating speaker
lighting
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
Airbags
1
2
3
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
Head airbag
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
Front airbags
Side airbag
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection.
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and lap
area.
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
hands and the upper body is as far back as
possible while still maintaining a comfortable
grip on the steering wheel.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
son.
Knee airbag
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive film or coverings and do not attach
brackets or cables, for instance for navigation
devices or mobile phones.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of
a frontal impact.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents.
▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with ad‐
hesive, do not cover them or modify them in
any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front passenger seat that
are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐
gering. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Follow the information on achieving the opti‐
mum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands
can be crossed over the steering wheel. Se‐
lect the settings so that the shoulder rests
against the backrest when crossing the
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
Customer Relations for further information.
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
Operational readiness of the
airbag system
General information
The power that triggers the driver's/front passen‐
ger airbags depends on the position of the driv‐
er's/front passenger seat.
Safety information
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Warning
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
Calibrating the front seats
Warning
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, disassembled and scrapped
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
Display in the instrument cluster
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
When drive-ready state is turned on, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the seat belt tensioners.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
Malfunction
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is turned on.
▷ The warning light lights up continu‐
ously.
Have the system checked.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Automatic deactivation of
the front passenger airbags
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
Principle
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can
press against the seat from below.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
Safety information
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly lights up and then indicates whether the
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag function,
the system must be able to detect whether a
person is sitting in the front passenger seat.
The entire seat cushion area must be used for
this purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
vated.
Fault of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator
light for the front passenger airbags lights up.
Detected child restraint systems
In this case, change the seat position so that the
front passenger airbags are activated and the in‐
dicator light goes out.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front passenger air‐
bags lights up. This indicates that the child re‐
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat cushion:
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
straint system has been detected and the front
passenger airbags are not activated.
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Intelligent Safety
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Principle
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance systems.
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
▷ Approach control warning with light braking
function.
▷ Evasion Assistant.
▷ Intersection collision warning.
▷ Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation.
▷ Lane departure warning.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
Warning
Turning on/off
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Warning
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Press the button.
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
ings may vary with the current driving situation.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
When the vehicle is driven so that it is intention‐
ally approaching another vehicle, the Forward
Collision Warning and brake intervention are de‐
layed in order to avoid false system reactions.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐
tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the
system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐
sion and visibility also affect the timing of the
warnings.
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between:
Safety information
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Approach control warning
with light braking function
Principle
The Forward Collision Warning warns of a possi‐
ble risk of collision and may brake independently.
In the event of an accident, the system may re‐
duce impact speed.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Press the button repeatedly.
Overview
The following settings are switched be‐
Button in the vehicle
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Manual switching off
Intelligent Safety
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Button Status
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor.
Additional information:
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Turning on/off
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Turning on automatically
The system is automatically active when the ve‐
hicle is turned on.
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on manually
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Brake intervention
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
nent.
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐
fully.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
Icon Measure
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Icon lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
City brake function: the brake intervention occurs
to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
With radar sensor: the brake intervention occurs
to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
brake intervention occurs as a brief braking pres‐
sure. No automatic delay occurs.
Prewarning
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
System limits
Safety information
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐
pending on the driving situation and the equip‐
ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐
panied by a brief activation of the braking
system.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
If an acute warning is provided, the system may
also provide assistance, such as through auto‐
matic brake intervention, when there is risk of
collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ In tight curves.
Detection range
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
The system's detection capability is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
Evasion Assistant
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
Principle
The Evasion Assistant supports the driver in
making evasive maneuvers in certain situations,
such as when obstacles or persons suddenly ap‐
pear.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or strongly decelerating vehicles.
General information
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
viding targeted supporting steering movements.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
Safety information
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster
If a collision with a detected vehicle or a detected
person is imminent, a warning symbol appears
on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up
Display.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Icon Measure
Icon lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Overview
Sensors
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for obsta‐
cles.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐
destrians.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
Acute warning with evasion support
An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
approaching another object at a high speed.
Functional requirements
▷ Pedestrian Warning with braking function is
switched on.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision.
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitiga‐
▷ Approach control warning with light braking
function is switched on.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Approach control warning with light braking
System limits
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Safety information
Turning on/off
The system is automatically active when the ve‐
hicle is turned on.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
Detection range
Intersection collision
warning
Principle
The system may prevent some accidents with
cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation.
The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐
cles enter into the detection range of the system.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐
sued when a danger of collision with crossing
traffic is detected.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of
warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐
tion.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐
tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the
timing of the warnings.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
Warning
Sensors
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
Additional information:
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Turning on/off
Turning on automatically
The system is automatically active when the ve‐
hicle is turned on.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Manual switching off
Icon Meaning
Danger of collision with vehicle cross‐
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
ing from the right.
Danger of collision with vehicle cross‐
ing from the left.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Danger of collision with vehicle for
which the driving direction cannot be
determined.
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Display with prewarning
The respective icon lights up red: prewarning for
vehicles that cross your driving direction.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking.
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
Display with acute warning
The respective icon flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles
cross your driving direction.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐
sary.
Prewarning
For example, a prewarning is displayed when a
danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐
tected.
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Warning with braking function
Display
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in the event of an
immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐
hicle.
General information
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
nent.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐
vide assistance, such as through automatic brake
intervention, when there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Brake intervention
Detection range
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
The system's detection capability is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
System limits
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by
buildings, for instance.
Safety information
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
▷ Crossing bicycles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles when
your own speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Pedestrian Warning with
City Collision Mitigation
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Principle
The Pedestrian Warning warns in the city speed
range of possible risk of collision with pedes‐
trians and bicycle riders and may brake inde‐
pendently. In the event of an accident, the sys‐
tem may reduce impact speed.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Safety information
Intelligent Safety
Warning
Sensors
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor.
Additional information:
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Press the button repeatedly.
Detection range
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
The detection range in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
Manual switching off
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Turning on/off
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Turning on automatically
The system is automatically active when the ve‐
hicle is turned on.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
The red icon is displayed and a signal
sounds.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
Alternatively, depending on the vehicle
equipment, a red warning triangle lights
up in the instrument cluster.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
Brake intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
While a warning is active, the maximum braking
force is used when the brake is applied. In order
to activate the Brake Assistant function, the
brakes must be applied sufficiently quickly and
forcefully.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
assist with brake intervention.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited or may not be availa‐
ble in the following situations:
System limits
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
Safety information
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Lane departure warning
Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
Upper speed limit
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
Detection range
The system's detection capability is limited.
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐
fore leaving the lane.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Depending on the equipment version, if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information
Warning
Intelligent Safety
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
Additional information:
Warning
Turning on/off
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Turning on automatically
The lane departure warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the completion of the last trip.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every driving
off. The base setting is thereby activated.
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
lane markings in curves or with dynamic
passing without blinker.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems.
Manual switching off
Press and hold this button.
Switch steering intervention on/off
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Button Status
1. "CAR"
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active after
every driving off.
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
Display in the instrument cluster
2. "Settings"
The icon illuminates green: at lane mark‐
ing was detected on at least one side of
the vehicle and warnings can be issued.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
Warning function
If you leave the lane
▷ "Medium"
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance when purposely driving over
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
ting.
System limits
When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐
sponding direction before changing the lane, a
warning is not issued.
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment version: if, in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system may intervene
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐
ing an active steering intervention, the display in
the instrument cluster will blink.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Warning signal
Depending on the equipment version: in the
event of multiple active steering interventions by
the system within 3 minutes without the driver's
intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic
warning will sound. A short warning signal will
sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐
ginning with the third steering intervention, an
continuous warning will sound.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.
The warning signal and Check Control message
are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
the lane.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
End of warning
For instance, the warning will be canceled in the
following situations:
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is not fully functional.
▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When blinking.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts.
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
displayed on the Control Display in the menu for
the steering intervention.
Active Blind Spot
Detection
Safety information
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
hind in the adjacent lane.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
The light in the exterior mirror warns the driver in
different steps.
General information
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and next
to the vehicle when traveling faster than a mini‐
mum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Intelligent Safety
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds
of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐
tervene with a brief active steering intervention
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.
The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Turning on/off
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Turning on automatically
Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically acti‐
vated after departure if the function was
switched on at the completion of the last trip.
Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on manually
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
6. Select the desired setting.
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation: switching steering
intervention on/off
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Manual switching off
1. "CAR"
Press and hold this button.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
4. "Safety and Warnings"
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
6. "Steering intervention"
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
serves as system self-test.
System limits
Warning function
Safety information
Light in the exterior mirror
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
proaching from behind.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Acute warning
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐
cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐
brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror
flashes brightly.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or the turn signal has been
deactivated.
▷ On vehicles with side collision warning: cam‐
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation
When there is no response to the vibration of the
steering wheel at speeds of up to
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering
wheel and can be manually overridden at any
time.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
steering intervention can be limited, for instance
in the following situation:
General information
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
jects.
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the ve‐
hicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
▷ If the camera is impaired.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.
For this purpose, the system issues a warning
with a blinking LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐
brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system
will carry out an active steering intervention.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature warnings of critical situations.
Safety information
Side collision mitigation
Principle
Warning
The side collision warning helps to avoid immi‐
nent side collisions.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as
a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of
the menu are activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Intelligent Safety
Sensors
Manual switching off
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Turning on/off
Turning on automatically
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the completion of the last trip.
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
System limits
Safety information
2. "Settings"
Warning
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
Acute warning
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
If necessary, an active steering intervention takes
place to prevent the collision and maintain the
vehicle within its own lane.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Rear-end collision
preparation
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version, the rear-end collision preparation can
react to vehicles approaching from behind.
General information
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehi‐
cle.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active when the ve‐
hicle is turned on.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as as fol‐
lows:
▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning flashers
will be switched on.
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions are
triggered.
▷ When driving in reverse.
System limits
Safety information
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ The approaching vehicle is approaching
slowly.
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
If equipped with Equipment
Stop Assistant
Principle
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer‐
gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
▷ With lane change function: lane changes are
executed when the traffic situation allows.
Activating the emergency stop
function
General information
The emergency stop function is not triggered
automatically. The emergency stop function can
only be triggered manually by the occupants.
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly
to activate the emergency stop function.
▷ With lane change function: releasing the
switch may trigger an automatic lane change.
When the system is activated, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane guidance.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for
a maximum of 2 minutes.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An emergency call is triggered.
Depending on the equipment version and na‐
tional market version, the system includes a lane
change function.
With lane change function: on motorways or mo‐
torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle
to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐
ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐
tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the
actual road.
Canceling the emergency stop
function
The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐
tion by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
For instance, the emergency stop function will
be canceled in the following situations:
Overview
▷ When steering.
▷ When blinking.
▷ When depressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.
▷ When switching the selector lever position at
standstill.
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is
pressed.
Parking brake
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system
will carry out the following settings:
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐
ance of a driver who is fit to drive.
▷ The central locking system is unlocked.
BMW Drive Recorder
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video re‐
cordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic.
Icon
Status
Emergency Stop function active.
General information
There are various ways for storing video record‐
ings:
Without lane change function:
Icon Status
▷ Automatic storage of the recording.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The function allows the documentation of the
event of an accident.
When lane markings are detected, the
system keeps the vehicle in the lane.
▷ Manual storage of the recording.
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The function allows the documentation of
traffic situations.
Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.
The system records up to 20 seconds before
and after the activation of the storage.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
Lane marking driven over.
Cameras of the assistance systems are used, for
instance Panorama View.
When lane markings are detected, the
system keeps the vehicle in the lane.
Additionally, the following parameters are stored
for the trip:
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
▷ Date.
The hands are not grasping the steer‐
ing wheel. The system is still active.
▷ Time.
▷ Vehicle speed.
Red steering wheel symbol and a sig‐
nal sounds:
▷ Global Positioning System coordinates.
The hands are not grasping the steer‐
ing wheel. Interruption of lane guidance
is imminent.
Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory regu‐
lations of the country in which the system is to
be used. The user is responsible for the use of
the system and compliance with the respective
regulations.
Red steering wheel symbol and a sig‐
nal sounds:
Lane guidance is switched off.
System limits
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐
ure.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state or
country prior to the initial use. In addition, the
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
laws with respect to use of the system should be
verified in regular intervals, especially when bor‐
ders are frequently crossed.
Via iDrive
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Start recording"
To stop the recording: "Cancel".
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information about
the system is required when handing off the ve‐
hicle.
Recording can also be started by selecting the
widget on the Control Display.
Functional requirements
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
▷ Privacy Policy accepted.
Recording playback and
administration
Stored video recordings can be played back, ex‐
ported and deleted.
▷ Recording type selected.
▷ Recording time selected.
For your own safety, the video recording is only
displayed on the Control Display up to approx.
2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions,
the video recording is only displayed if the park‐
ing brake is engaged or if the selector lever is in
selector lever position P.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐
fore the first use of the recording function.
1. "Apps"
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Saved recordings"
4. Select desired recording.
5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. Accept Privacy Policy.
4. "Settings"
5. "Recording allowed"
6. Select the desired setting.
If a camera change occurred during the record‐
ing, different segments of the video can be se‐
lected.
Recording functions
Automatic recording
Settings
The recording is stored automatically when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence.
General information
Different settings can be made.
Manual recording
Recording type
1. "Apps"
Using the button
Press and hold this button.
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Settings"
4. "RECORDING TYPE"
5. Select the desired setting.
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Certain functions of several systems can, within
the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐
gering:
Recording time
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Settings"
▷ Forward Collision Warning: automatic brake
intervention.
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant
▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐
nent rear collisions.
Cameras
1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
3. "Settings"
Safety information
4. "Camera selection"
5. Select desired camera.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, critical situation could not be detected
reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
In case of an accident, the system switches au‐
tomatically to "All" cameras.
If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐
era views are selected automatically.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not be
possible to store recordings if the damage on the
vehicle is too great or the power supply was in‐
terrupted.
Function
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
front passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
Active Protection
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
Principle
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or
collision situations.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐
cluding sun protection.
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version, Active Protection consists of various
PreCrash functions.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
rest for the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This
includes the following critical driving situations:
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
safety belt before continuing on your trip.
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
All other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
Fatigue alert
Principle
PostCrash – iBrake
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto‐
nous trips, for instance on highways. The system
recommends a break.
Principle
In the event of an accident, PostCrash can bring
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
vention by the driver in certain situations.
Safety information
General information
Warning
PostCrash can reduce the risk of another colli‐
sion and subsequent consequences.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
matically.
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-ready
state is switched on.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
by the automatic braking function. Automatic
braking is interrupted.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of
trip.
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of
the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐
era.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
is active and can also display a recommendation
to take a break.
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Safety
CONTROLS
Break recommendation
Adjusting
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
5. Select the desired setting.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be se‐
lected.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
▷ When the time is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road condition is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and
options
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Drive-off assistant
Principle
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
uphill grades.
Antilock Braking System
ABS
Driving off
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) prevents
locking of the wheels during braking.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The vehicle maintains its steerability even during
emergency braking, which increases the active
driving safety.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant
The Brake Assistant effects maximum braking
assistance when the brake is applied quickly. It
reduces the braking distance to a minimum dur‐
ing emergency braking. The advantages of the
Antilock Braking System (ABS) are thereby uti‐
lized.
Principle
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
drive power and by brake intervention on individ‐
ual wheels.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of emergency braking.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
Deactivating/activating DSC
General information
▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
Safety information
To increase driving stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
Warning
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light turn off.
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Driving with roof load only
with activated Dynamic Stability Control.
Display
In the instrument cluster
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
Overview
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Button in the vehicle
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating DTC
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Activating DTC
Press the button.
Principle
Dynamic Traction Control (DTC) is a version of
the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) where drive
power is optimized.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
The system ensures maximum drive power on
unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed
snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but
with somewhat limited driving stability.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light turn off.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
Indicator/warning lights
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
vated.
▷ When driving with tire chains.
Automatic program change
Overview
In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol (DSC) is activated automatically:
Button in the vehicle
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Principle
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and and
other suspension control systems, such as Dy‐
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
namic Stability Control (DSC), further optimizes
traction and driving dynamics.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. For in‐
stance, this results in a harmonious lane change.
General information
xDrive variably distributes the driving power to
the front and rear axles as demanded by the driv‐
ing situation and road condition.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented
to sport oriented.
Tuning
The system offers several different tunings.
Because of the needs-based use of the all-
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐
tion in consumption.
Driving mode
Integral Active Steering
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Comfortable, for optimal
travel comfort.
M sport differential
SPORT
Dynamic, for greater agility.
The active M differential provides for continu‐
ously variable locking of the rear axle differential
depending on the driving situation. This prevents
spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐
vides optimal traction in any driving situation.
The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol.
Additional information:
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐
ing style to the situation.
Using tire chains
In order to guarantee free movement of the
wheels when operating with tire chains, rear axle
steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when tire chains are mounted.
Integral Active Steering
Principle
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐
neuverability and makes a more direct steering
response possible.
Additional information:
Rear axle steering during operation with tire
chains, refer to page 341.
General information
Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐
ble steering ratio and rear axle steering.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further at lower speeds, while the
vehicle responds more sensitively to steering
wheel movements in the higher speed range.
The steering is more direct because the variable
steering ratio amplifies the wheel angle while
maneuvering. The rear axle steering acts to in‐
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction
to the front wheels.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering facilitates direct and
agile handling with little steering effort. The varia‐
ble sports steering works independently of the
current speed, varying the steering ratio in line
with the steering angle.
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
Operation
Vehicle features and
options
Turning on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The current speed is accepted as the speed
limit.
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
stationary or driving at low speeds,
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving
mode may be switched on as well.
Manual Speed Limiter
Principle
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding
speed limits.
Turning off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations, for example:
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at a
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be
driven at any speed below the set speed limit.
▷ When the engine is switched off.
▷ When cruise control is switched on.
▷ When certain programs are activated via the
Driving Dynamics Control.
Overview
The displays turn off.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Interrupting
If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐
tem is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Button Function
System on/off.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Changing the speed limit
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the
vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal
all the way down, there is no signal.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a
value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the system.
The current speed can also be stored by press‐
ing a button:
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted.
Exceeding the speed limit
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
limit, a warning is issued.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
There is no warning in this case.
Indicator light
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
tem is switched on.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.
▷ The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
terrupted.
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Cruise control
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys‐
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Overview
General information
Buttons on the steering wheel
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Button Function
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
Cruise control on/off.
Safety information
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Warning
Pause cruise control.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Switching cruise control on/off
Turning on
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer‐
ing wheel.
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
the current speed.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as set speed.
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
eter.
Turning off
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer‐
ing wheel.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Press the button.
Pausing cruise control
Changing the speed
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When braking manually.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
▷ Steptronic transmission: gear lever position D
is disengaged.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Setting the speed
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐
ator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional deceleration or acceleration may occur.
System limits
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if
the drive power is insufficient.
Press the button with the system inter‐
rupted.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function ACC
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Principle
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and a
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted us‐
ing the buttons on the steering wheel.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the system.
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto‐
matically.
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
lows.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
Indicator light
▷ Indicator light green: system is active.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
the system is able to detect this within the given
system limits.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
Safety information
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Warning
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Cruise control on/off.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Select function.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Cruise control on/off.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐
gested speed manually.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Pause cruise control.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Warning
Pause cruise control.
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
Increase the distance.
Switch distance control on/off.
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Set function
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired func‐
tion is selected in the toolbar. The toolbar for As‐
sisted Driving mode is displayed at the bottom of
the instrument cluster.
Button Function
Reduce distance.
Switch distance control on/off.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Icon Function
Sensors
Cruise control with distance control.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
Depending on the equipment version,
cruise control with distance control and
steering and traffic jam assistant.
Additional information:
Application range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The selected function is shown in green.
Turning on
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle
equipment.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
2.
If necessary, set the cruise control.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Turning on/off and interrupting
cruise control
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the marking on the speedometer is set to
the current speed.
With steering and traffic jam
assistant: Assisted Driving Mode
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as set speed.
General information
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐
marily used function.
Turning off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel:
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
tivated.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
eter.
Interrupting automatically
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
Press the button.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Changing the speed
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
extended period, for instance on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
for instance by contamination or heavy pre‐
cipitation.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
tem.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
according to the traffic situation or the ambient
conditions, for instance poor visibility.
1. "CAR"
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Warning
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional deceleration or acceleration may occur.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, deceleration can be late. There may be a
risk of accident or risk of damage to property.
Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Ad‐
just the distance to the traffic and weather con‐
ditions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐
tance, possibly by braking.
Press the button on the steering wheel with the
system interrupted:
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
Reduce distance
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
▷ When the system is switched off.
Increase the distance
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Automatic adaptation of the
distance
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version: the system can be adjusted so that
the distance to the vehicle driving in front is auto‐
matically adjusted within the configured distance
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the system.
Changing between cruise control
with/without distance control
Safety information
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
Warning
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Adjust the set speed to
the traffic conditions and brake as needed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Change over mode of the cruise
control
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
shown.
Switching cruise control without distance control
off and on:
Icon
Description
Distance 1
▷
Press and hold this button.
▷
Press and hold this button.
With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on
distance control:
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
Press the button.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch
on distance control:
▷
Press the button.
▷
Press the button.
After changing, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched on.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Detected vehicle
Icon
Description
Symbol flashes gray:
Icon
Description
Green icon:
The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐
creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐
play will move away.
Vehicle symbol flashes red and a
signal sounds:
If necessary, independent drive-off, such as by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by pressing
the rocker switch.
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary.
Alternative displays
Indicator/warning lights
Icon
Description
Icon
Description
Indicator light green: system is
active.
Vehicle symbol white:
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
Vehicle symbol flashes:
Green icon:
The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol goes out if
no vehicle in front is detected.
Vehicle symbol flashes green:
Vehicle in front drove off.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars blink red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Gray icon:
System interrupted.
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary.
System interrupted.
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
detected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Set speed
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users.
▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traffic
lights.
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the distance
from the vehicle traveling ahead is too
short.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
The distance information is active in the follow‐
ing situations:
Merging vehicles
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges
into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐
tomatically restore the selected distance. It may
not be possible to restore the selected distance
in certain situations, including if you are driving
significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of
you, for instance when rapidly approaching a
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐
ably detected, the system requests that the
driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐
sive maneuvers, if needed.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Detection range
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Cornering
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle detection.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
When the set speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may
not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve
at an appropriate speed.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if
the drive power is insufficient.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
Speed Limit Assistant
Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be applied.
General information
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this
new speed value can be applied for the following
systems:
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function
ACC.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐
vated.
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
Safety information
▷ "Show anticipation": current and upcom‐
ing speed limits are displayed in the in‐
strument cluster without being applied.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed limits
are displayed without being applied in the
instrument cluster.
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit
Assistant will be turned off.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Warning
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster
when the system and a driver assistance system
are activated.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Icon
Function
Depending on the equipment ver‐
sion, the indicator light illuminates
green, together with the icon for a
cruise control system:
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Speed Limit Assistant is active and
detected speed limits can be ap‐
plied manually for the displayed
system.
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
Detected change of a speed limit
with immediate effect.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Indicator light illuminates green:
the detected speed limit can be
applied with the SET button.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied manually
for the active driver assistance system.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Speed limits"
When the SET icon lights up, press the
button.
7. Select the desired setting:
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Adapt to route
Principle
The system can be configured so that the vehi‐
cle adapts the speed automatically to the route.
Steering Assistant
Principle
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle in
the lane. For this purpose, the system executes
supporting steering movements, for instance
when driving in a curve.
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations, if necessary:
▷ Before making turns.
▷ Before a roundabout.
▷ Before a curve.
General information
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
front.
Adjustment
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Safety information
Warning
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for
the Active Cruise Control ACC.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system may not respond at all or with limitations
to the route when the navigation system is un‐
able to clearly identify the position of the vehicle.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Additional information:
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information, re‐
Steering and traffic jam assistant incl.
Traffic Jam Assistant on/off.
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
Switch function on.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
Set function
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired func‐
tion is selected in the toolbar. The toolbar for As‐
sisted Driving mode is displayed at the bottom of
the instrument cluster.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Icon Function
Functional requirements
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
Cruise control with distance control.
Depending on the equipment version,
cruise control with distance control and
steering and traffic jam assistant.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐
ing on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐
tected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
The selected function is shown in green.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off.
Turning on
1.
Press the button on the steering
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
wheel.
▷ Cruise control with distance control active.
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Forward Collision Warning active.
▷ Pedestrian Warning active.
2.
Adjust the steering and traffic jam
assistant if necessary.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
▷ Side Collision Warning active.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
Turning on/off
Assisted Driving Mode
General information
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the Pedestrian
Warning with City Collision Mitigation and the
side collision mitigation are active.
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐
marily used function.
Turning off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The system does not perform supportive steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Icon
Description
Yellow flashing steering wheel
symbol:
Interrupting automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When leaving own lane.
Yellow steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
System interruption is imminent.
Steering wheel symbol blinks
red, signal sounds:
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
System is switching off.
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a certain
period of time and no vehicle is driving ahead.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
still active.
▷ The Active Cruise Control ACC is interrupted.
▷ The safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐
tened.
Red steering wheel symbol and
a signal sounds:
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System interrup‐
tion is imminent.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
The system reduces the speed
to a standstill if applicable.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting
steering movements.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Icon
Description
Alternative displays
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are
displayed as follows:
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
Icon
Description
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within the
lane.
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Displays on the steering wheel
Icon
Description
Depending on equipment, yel‐
low flashing steering wheel sym‐
bol:
Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
Yellow steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster:
System interruption is imminent.
Depending on equipment, steer‐
ing wheel symbol flashes red,
signal sounds:
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
System is switching off.
The steering wheel displays can be switched
on/off if required.
Green steering wheel icon and
lane marking icon:
1. "CAR"
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within the
lane.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Light elements"
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
still active.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
Red steering wheel symbol and
a signal sounds:
System limits
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System interrup‐
tion is imminent.
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
used in certain situations.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting
steering movements.
Safety information
With Active Cruise Control, the
system may reduce the speed.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Extended Traffic Jam
Assistant
Principle
Extended Traffic Jam Assistant supports the
driver with vehicle control in traffic jam situations.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Supporting steering movements take place with‐
out the driver actively steering.
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel
contact in the following situations:
General information
The system uses the sensors of the steering and
lane control assistant.
▷ Driving with gloves.
Safety information
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
Warning
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
▷ In construction areas.
▷ Depending on the equipment, with automatic
formation of emergency lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
State laws differ and the use of this function may
violate the law. Before use, check your state and
local laws.
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
ings.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and
Lane Control Assistant apply.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Additional information:
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Functional requirements
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled.
▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐
tive.
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ The function is only available on certain street
Displays in the instrument
cluster
types, e.g. freeways.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists.
Icon
Description
▷ Sufficient lane width.
Indicator light green: system is
active.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected.
Indicator light white: system is
ready.
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying
attention to the traffic.
Gray indicator light: the system
has been interrupted.
▷ The function must be available in the country
in which the vehicle is driven.
Alternative displays
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are
displayed as follows:
Turning on
As soon as all functional requirements
are met, Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
will be displayed as an additional icon in
the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at
the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Indicator
light
Description
Indicator light green: system is
active.
Select Extended Traffic Jam Assistant
with the button on the steering wheel.
The icon for Extended Traffic Jam Assistant is
shown in green.
Displays on the steering wheel
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐
cle control.
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
System limits
Safety information
General information
The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐
sistant system apply.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Additional information:
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Driver Attention Camera
Always monitor the traffic conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or
not the driver is paying attention to the traffic
conditions.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and
Lane Control Assistant apply.
Additional information:
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel.
Functional requirements
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled.
▷ With sunglasses with high protection from in‐
frared light.
Depending on the
equipment version:
Automatic Lane Change
Assistant
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists and with physical barriers to oncoming
traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Principle
Switch lane change assist on/off
1. "CAR"
The system additionally supports the driver when
changing lanes on multilane roads.
2. "Settings"
General information
The system uses the sensors of the steering and
lane control assistant.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Steering Assistance"
6. "Automatic Lane Change"
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Changing lanes
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Icon
Description
2. Press the turn signal lever in the required di‐
rection to the pressure point for signaling
briefly.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Green arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
A supporting steering movement in the re‐
quired direction can be detected a short time
later.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐
tions:
After the lane change, the system helps keep the
vehicle in the new lane.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Canceling a lane change
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction.
Lane change not possible; func‐
tional requirements not met.
Alternative displays
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are
displayed as follows:
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Icon
Description
Depending on the
equipment version: lane
change with active
guidance
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Green arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Principle
The system assists the driver when lane
changes are necessary to reach a navigation
destination.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
General information
The system uses the sensors of the steering and
lane control assistant.
No arrow symbol for lane-
changing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Safety information
Depending on country specifica‐
tions:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Lane change not possible; func‐
tional requirements not met.
Additionally, the notices for the Active Cruise
Control and the Steering and Lane Control As‐
sistant apply.
System limits
The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐
sistant system apply.
Additional information:
Additional information:
▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to
Functional requirements
▷ Active Cruise Control is activated.
▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
▷ Lane markings on the side of the desired lane
change detected.
▷ Navigation system: guidance is activated.
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Adaptation to the course of the route is acti‐
vated.
Turn on adaptation to the course
of the route
▷ The function must be available in the country
in which the vehicle is driven.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Changing lanes
1. One or more lane changes are required to
reach a navigation destination.
The system prepares for this lane change.
For this purpose, the system determines a
suitable opening in the traffic flow on the next
lane.
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route"
System limits
2. When a gap is detected, the speed is
adapted so that the vehicle remains at the
level of the opening.
The limits of the Active Cruise Control and
Steering and Lane Control Assistant systems ap‐
ply.
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane
change suggestion.
Parking assistance
systems
When Steering Assistant is active, a steering
intervention in the direction of the relevant
lane may occur.
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into
the next lane.
Principle
The parking assistance systems support the
driver in parking and maneuvering.
When equipped with Automatic Lane Change
Assistant: after the Check Control message
has been displayed, the Automatic Lane
Change Assistant can be started by operating
the turn signal.
General information
The parking assistance systems comprise the
following individual systems.
Additional information:
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
Icon Function
▷ Depending on equipment version: emer‐
gency brake function, Active PDC, refer to
The suggestion for the lane change is
displayed and a green checkmark indi‐
cates the active function.
▷ Without Surround View: rearview camera, re‐
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the
Assisted Driving View of the instrument cluster.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
Additional information:
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Surround View with rearview camera, refer to
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
PDC Park Distance Control
Overview
Principle
Park Distance Control (PDC) helps with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles in
front of or behind the vehicle.
Button in the vehicle
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles
that are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors
may also be reported by the side protection.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
Park assistance button
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
Sensors
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
Safety information
▷ Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic sen‐
sors on the side.
Additional information:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Turning on/off
Turning on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
Warning
the engine is running.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
approaching detected obstacles at a speed
slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The ac‐
tivation distance depends on the situation in
question.
Signal tones
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is
detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the rear left speaker.
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐
stacles are detected on and off.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"
When there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating constant
tone will sound.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on.
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
and constant tone are switched off if the selector
lever position P is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Volume
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.
Switching on/off manually
1. "CAR"
Press the park assistance button.
2. "Settings"
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Volume PDC signal"
6. Set the desired value.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐
verse gear is engaged.
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
Visual warning
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
Display before a signal sounds.
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the
following situations:
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
detected.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
Lanes are faded in for better estimation of the re‐
quired space.
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar‐
ranted warnings.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as needed:
To prevent unwarranted alarms, switch off auto‐
matic Park Distance Control PDC activation on
obstacle detection, for instance in automatic car
washes.
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip‐
ment, it is warned in the PDC display against ve‐
hicles approaching in the front or rear from the
side.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Additional information:
White icon is displayed, and the range of
the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
System limits
PDC Park Distance Control malfunction. Have
the system checked by a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
Depending on equipment
version: emergency brake
function, Active PDC
Additional information:
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
Principle
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
collision.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
Temporary switching off
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
The emergency brake function can be switched
off temporarily:
Confirm the message on the Control Display.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐
uation, no further emergency braking will occur.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention.
Settings
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will
be protected by the system.
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with
caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐
erator pedal and release as needed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the
vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at
any time.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
6. Select the desired setting.
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐
sistant.
System limits
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.
Safety information
Warning
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
where applicable.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
With Parking Assistant:
side parking aid
Principle
The side protection warns of obstacles on the
side of the vehicle.
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
General information
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐
sistant.
stacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the
vehicle was not yet captured.
Safety information
Warning
Limits of the side parking aid
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
markings are shown in black after a certain time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
tured.
Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park
Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant
apply.
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
Additional information:
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
Principle
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Display
Additionally, assistance functions can be shown
in the display, e.g., help lines.
Safety information
Warning
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
Press the park assistance button.
Overview
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: button in the vehicle
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.
2.
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Park assistance button
Functional requirements
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
open. Protruding cargo, roof rack systems or
trailers can limit the detection range of the
camera.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information:
Display on the Control Display
Toolbars
Turning on/off
The assistance functions can be activated man‐
ually via the toolbars on the sides of the Control
Display.
Turning on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
3.
▷
"Parking aid lines".
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Pathway lines and turning circle lines are
displayed.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
▷
"Obstacle mark.".
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
Control are displayed by markings.
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
Parking aid lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green lane covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Lanes
Obstacle marking
Lanes help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level roads.
Lanes depend on the steering angle and are
continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors.
Turning circle lines
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Setting brightness and contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on
the camera image together with lanes.
2.
"Camera image"
3. Select the desired setting.
Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐
est possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷ When parking in reverse perpendicular to the
road, perpendicular parking. The system ori‐
ents itself with the middle of the parking
space.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
driving out of parallel parking spaces.
Deactivated camera
When the camera is deactivated, for instance
when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is
displayed hatched in gray.
General information
Handling
Automatic Parking Assistant handling is divided
into three steps:
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Steptronic transmission
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates the
best possible parking line and takes control of
the following functions during the parking opera‐
tion:
With Parking Assistant:
Parking Assistant
▷ Steering.
Principle
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing gears.
The parking operation is automatic.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the
driver in the following situations:
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Functional requirements
For the measurement od parking
spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
22 mph/35 km/h.
NOTICE
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
Control apply in addition.
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Additional information:
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
Overview
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: own
vehicle length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
Button in the vehicle
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle width
plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
Park assistance button
For the parking operation
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.
Steptronic transmission:
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
Additional information:
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated au‐
tomatically.
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
Parking assistant is activated and parking
space search is active.
Switching on with reverse gear
1. Shift into reverse.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and
an acoustic signal sounds.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
2. If necessary, activate:
"Autom. Parking"
Switching on via iDrive
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view
must be active.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
detected, the system automatically adjusts
the suitable parking method. In the case of
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In
this case, the desired parking method must
be selected manually.
1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
Display:
"Autom. Parking"
▷
The parking operation is active. The sys‐
tem takes over the steering.
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
Icon
Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
Switching signal tone for
suitable parking spaces on/off
1. "CAR"
System is activated.
Parking space search is active.
2. "Settings"
The parking operation is active. The
system takes over the steering.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Automatic Parking"
Parking space search and system
status
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
Signal tones of the PDC Park
Distance Control
During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐
mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance to
a detected object is less than approx. 8 in‐
ches/20 cm.
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
Parking
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
tant.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
pear.
For this, engage the reverse gear or press the
parking assist button and activate the system
on the Control Display, if needed.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated.
▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐
ceeded.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and
at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ When changing over to another function on
the Control Display.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on the
Control Display.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ If the trunk lid is open.
▷ If doors are open.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the
parking operation: select the parking space
on the Control Display.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
The system takes over the steering.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
extended period while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
At the end of the parking operation, the P se‐
lector lever position is set.
The end of the parking operation is indicated
on the Control Display.
Resuming
An interrupted parking operation can be contin‐
ued, if needed.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the
instructions on the Control Display.
Interrupting manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter‐
rupted at any time:
Turning off
The system can be switched off manually:
▷
Press the park assistance button.
Press the park assistance button.
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the
Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
System limits
Safety information
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc‐
tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Depending on the
No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer
assistance in the following situations:
equipment version: driving
out of a parking space
using the parking assistant
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Principle
The system makes driving out of parallel parking
spaces easier.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
General information
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐
ver:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ Steering.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing gears.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can
drive out of the parking space without further
steering movements.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
4. On the Control Display, confirm the required
Safety information
direction for driving out of the parking space if
necessary.
Warning
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Steptronic transmission:
The system takes control of the maneuver. A
message will be displayed at the end of the
maneuver.
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of the parking space and drive off
as usual.
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is switched
off automatically.
Additional information:
System limits
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
With Parking Assistant:
Reversing Assistant
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects
in front of and behind the car are detected.
The distance to a detected curb is at least
6 inches/15 cm.
Principle
The Back-up Assistant supports the driver when
driving in reverse, for instance when driving out
of tight or confusing parking or street situations.
▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐
sistant and an object is detected in front of
the vehicle.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the
last route. This stored route can be driven back
with automated steering.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐
ger than your vehicle.
▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse.
General information
The system takes control of the steering when
driving in reverse along the stored route.
Driving out of parking spaces
1. Turn on drive readiness.
The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
erator pedal and brake.
2. Steptronic transmission:
Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to
switch on the Automatic Parking Assistant.
The Reversing Assistant uses the control ele‐
ments and sensors of the PDC Park Distance
Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate the
Automatic Parking Assistant on the Control
Additional information:
Display:
"Autom. Parking"
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display
where required.
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal
and the brake.
Safety information
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the
vehicle's surroundings, and if you encounter
an obstacle, stop immediately and take over
control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions
on the PDC Park Distance Control.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is
reached and take control of the vehicle, such
as by shifting to a forward gear.
At the end of the stored route, a signal will
sound and a request will be displayed, also
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐
hicle.
Additionally, the safety information for the PDC
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Assistant apply.
Terminating the system
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
Additional information:
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
▷ During activation or intervention by driving
control systems or assist systems.
Functional requirements
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the
route.
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
ing angle.
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.
▷ When the display on the Control Display is
cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐
coming calls.
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
Driving back with automated
steering
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary
and the drive-ready state is switched on.
System limits
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.
The system takes over the steering.
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
is issued and the function may be canceled.
▷ Unobstructed camera perspective, movable
via iDrive.
▷ After driving a stored distance with major
steering-wheel angles, the function of the
system will be limited for the return trip.
▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic, for
instance at junctions and driveways, depend‐
ing on the currently engaged gear.
▷ Additionally, the limits of the systems of the
Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking
Assistant apply.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround‐
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Additionally, assistance functions are shown in
the display, e.g., help lines.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving back on the stored route. For exam‐
ple, this includes the following factors:
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary while storing the distance covered.
Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
traveled.
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or in‐
clines.
▷ Side parking aid.
▷ Door opening angle.
Safety information
With Parking Assistant
Plus: Surround View
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Principle
Surround View supports the driver in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from different
selectable perspectives.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
Overview
▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system
shows the camera perspective suitable for
the respective driving situation.
Buttons in the vehicle
▷ Rearview camera: for representing the areas
behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view: for repre‐
senting the areas on the sides of the vehicle.
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Display on the Control Display
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Toolbar, left
Camera image
Side view
Turning on/off
Automatic camera perspective
Movable unobstructed camera perspective
Toolbar, right
Turning on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
Rearview camera
Selection window
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐
tive driving situation is displayed.
Toolbar on the left
Additional information:
The left toolbar can be used for the direct selec‐
tion of various views via iDrive. Move the Control‐
ler to the left, if needed.
Park Distance Control, turn on/off, refer to
▷
▷
▷
"Parking": around the vehicle.
"3D view": available camera.
"Car wash".
Switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or left
vehicle side.
Depending on the equipment version, the rear‐
view camera cannot be switched off when the
reverse gear is engaged.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
"Parking aid lines".
Automatic camera perspective
"Obstacle mark.".
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐
ing direction.
▷
"Settings": apply settings, for instance to
use the activation points for Panorama View.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation.
Rearview camera
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
era.
Selection window
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
the system uses a fixed perspective of the rear‐
view camera. If necessary, manually select the
automatic camera perspective when reverse
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per‐
spective will be retained for the current parking
operation.
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Parking aid lines
Lanes
Movable unobstructed camera
perspective
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
Lanes help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level roads.
The current perspective is marked with a camera
symbol.
Lanes depend on the steering angle and are
continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐
ways and select another camera function.
Toolbar on the right
Turning circle lines
Assistance functions can be activated and set‐
tings can be entered via the right toolbar via
iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
▷
▷
▷
"Autom. Parking".
"Back-up Assistant".
"Camera image":
"Brightness".
▷
▷
"Contrast".
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on
the camera image together with lanes.
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐
est possible turning radius on a level road.
Car wash view
Only one turning circle line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green lane covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's
own track.
Obstacle marking
Side parking aid
Principle
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles.
Limits of the side parking aid
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2.
"Camera image"
Door opening angle
3. Select the desired setting.
Principle
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations:
If obstacle marking is activated, the Surround
View indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
▷ In poor light.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching road users.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
Display
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Gray hatched areas with icon, for instance open
door, in the camera image mark areas that are
currently not displayed.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Steptronic transmission: the maximum opening
angles of the doors are displayed in selector
lever position P. As soon as the vehicle begins
moving, the opening angles are replaced by
parking aid lines.
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Limits of the display
Detection of objects
The vehicle's surroundings are displayed with
distorted image for technical reasons.
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Even if the symbols for the door opening angles
do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐
play, the following needs to be noted when park‐
ing next to other objects:
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Depending on the equipment version, the func‐
tion can only be used when driving forward.
Additional information:
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control
Display.
Safety information
A yellow icon is displayed and the re‐
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐
era is displayed in black on the Control
Display.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and vehicle surroundings closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
With Parking Assistant
Plus: Panorama View
Principle
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Panorama View gives you an earlier view of
crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and inter‐
sections.
Panorama View
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic
area to improve the view.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Front camera.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front
and rear end of the vehicle.
▷ Depending on the equipment: rearview cam‐
era.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for
distance estimations.
Additional information:
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Using activation points
Display on the Control Display
The use of activation points can be switched on
and off.
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image of
the respective camera is displayed:
1.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
Press the button.
▷ "Front": front camera image.
▷ "Rear": rear camera image.
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐
fic warning can additionally warn of approaching
vehicles using radar sensors.
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
when set activation points are reached."
Additional information:
Displaying activation points
1.
Press the button.
With navigation system:
activation points
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3.
"Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Principle
Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a Global Positioning System
signal is received.
Renaming or deleting activation
points
1.
Press the button.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
3.
"Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5. Select the desired setting.
Storing activation points
1. Drive to the position at which the system is to
be switched on, and stop.
Functional limitations
The Surround View functional limitations apply.
Additional information:
2.
Press the button.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Activation point"
System limits
The limits of the Surround View system apply.
The current position is displayed.
5. "Save activation point"
Additional information:
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address, or else with the
Global Positioning System coordinates.
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Switching on/off individually
With Parking Assistant
Plus: Remote 3D View
Pre-adjustment
1. "CAR"
Principle
2. "Settings"
The BMW app and the pictures of the Surround
View cameras in combination with the corre‐
sponding equipment enable the display of the
vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device.
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Select services individually"
6. "My BMW app & customer portal"
7. "Remote 3D View"
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
Turning on/off
1. "CAR"
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
2. "Settings"
▷ Front camera.
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Individual selection"
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information:
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Functional requirements
▷ Data transmission must be activated.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ BMW app must be installed on the mobile
device.
▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile
with an existing ConnectedDrive account
must be activated.
▷ With manually folded in exterior mirrors.
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐
formed in the vehicle.
Switching the function on/off
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
Switching on/off with other
functions
1. "CAR"
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
every country.
2. "Settings"
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two
hours.
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
fic and parking situation closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Remote Control Parking
Principle
The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven
out in reverse in the case of suitable forward-
parking spaces, for instance a garage. The driver
controls the parking operation responsibly from
the outside using the BMW display key.
Warning
Unauthorized persons, for instance children,
can move the vehicle using the BMW display
key without anybody in the vehicle. There is a
risk of accident. Protect the BMW display key
against unauthorized use.
Stop the vehicles manually in the case of obsta‐
cles.
General information
NOTICE
The following systems are included in the sys‐
tem:
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
▷ Parking assistant.
▷ BMW display key.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
Using the BMW display key, the vehicle can be
moved by approx. 2 times the vehicle length.
The speed is approx. 1.1 mph/1.8 km/h.
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Button on the BMW display key: the button on
the side of the BMW display key must be
pressed and held for the duration of the parking
operation so that the vehicle can move. Release
the button for obstacles to manually stop the ve‐
hicle. The vehicle stops with emergency braking.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
If the ultrasound sensors detect obstacles in the
parking space or the end of the parking space,
the system automatically stops the vehicle as
needed.
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
More information: sensors of the vehicle, refer to
The headlight is switched on for the duration of
the procedure.
Functional requirements
General information
There are no occupants in the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing traffic
and parking situation. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all sit‐
uations. There is a risk of accident. Watch traf‐
Driver interventions in the vehicle's interior,
such as steering, will cancel the function.
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Cameras and ultrasound sensors
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers.
Forward parking
Parking
While driving forward, the system applies minor
steering corrections as needed.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed. Clean
them as needed.
▷ Keep camera lenses clean and unobstructed.
Clean them as needed.
1. Approach the parking space driving forward,
as straight and centered as possible and with
a maximum distance of 6.5 ft/2 m.
Suitable parking space
2. Engage selector lever position P and set the
parking brake. Switch off the drive-ready
state and engine using the Start/Stop button.
Alternatively, the engine can continue to run.
3. All the occupants leave the vehicle. Closing
the doors.
4. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key and cancel the display lock.
On the BMW display key, change to the
menu: "R/C parking"
▷ It is possible to forward-park into the parking
space in a straight, centered line.
5.
Press and hold the button on the side of
the BMW display key for the duration of the
parking operation.
▷ Width of the parking space: own vehicle width
without exterior mirrors, plus approx.
1.3 ft/0.4 m on each side, arrow 1.
6. Wait, until operational readiness is indicated
on the display. Observe possible text mes‐
sages.
▷ Distance to parking space, max. 6.5 ft/2 m, ar‐
row 2.
▷ To move the vehicle with remote control, the
driver must hold the BMW display key within
the wireless range, arrow 3, outside the vehi‐
cle.
7. "ENGINE START": tap the button to start the
engine if necessary.
8. To start the parking operation: touch the ar‐
row symbol for "drive forward" on the display.
Maximum distance to vehicle approx.
5 ft/1.5 m to approx. 10 ft/3 m.
Press and hold the button: the vehicle
moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐
lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐
ing range to stop the vehicle.
▷ Uphill or downhill grades max. 5 %.
▷ No duplex garages.
For approach movements: touch the arrow
symbol for "drive backward".
9. At the end of the parking operation, release
the button on the side of the BMW display
key. The vehicle stops.
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button.
▷ The parking brake is set.
▷ The engine is switched off.
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key.
8. At the end of the reversing out operation, re‐
lease the button on the side of the BMW dis‐
play key. The vehicle stops.
Cancel, pause, continue the parking
operation
Cancel or interrupt the parking operation:
9. Enter using the BMW display key and drive
off as normal.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be switched off
using the BMW display key:
Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐
gency braking.
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button.
▷ The parking brake is set.
▷ The engine is switched off.
Continue the parking operation:
Press button again. Observe possible text
messages.
Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key,
where applicable.
Driving out in reverse
Driving out of parking spaces
When driving in reverse, the vehicle drives back‐
ward in a straight line without steering.
Cancel, pause, continue the parking
operation
Cancel or interrupt the parking operation:
1. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key and cancel the display lock.
Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐
gency braking.
2. Unlock the vehicle.
Continue the parking operation:
Press button again. Observe possible text
messages.
3. On the BMW display key, change to the
menu: "R/C parking"
Messages on the BMW display
key
4.
Press and hold the button on the side of
the BMW display key for the duration of the
parking operation.
The icon identifies system messages.
5. Wait, until operational readiness is indicated
on the display. Observe possible text mes‐
sages.
System limits
6. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en‐
gine starts.
Safety information
7. To start the reversing out operation: touch
the arrow icon for "drive backward" on the
display.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Press and hold the button: the vehicle
moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐
lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐
ing range to stop the vehicle.
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
No parking assistance
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer
assistance in the following situations:
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐
urements can run into physical limits.
▷ In tight curves.
The limits of the ultrasonic measurement of the
Park Distance Control PDC apply.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Additional information:
▷ At very high or very low external tempera‐
tures.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Cross traffic warning
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of per‐
pendicular parking spaces, road users approach‐
ing from the side are detected sooner by the
cross traffic warning than is possible from the
driver's seat.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
General information
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
The system indicates approaching road users.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
Two additional radar sensors are located in the
front bumpers.
Functional limitations due to radio
interference
In the case of radio interference, functional limita‐
tions may occur during Remote Control Parking
with the BMW display key.
Additional information:
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Safety information
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
With the button
1.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
Press the park assistance button.
4. "Cross Traffic Warning"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
Overview
Via iDrive
Button in the vehicle
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Cross Traffic Warning"
6. "Cross traffic warning"
Turning on automatically
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
Park assistance button
Sensors
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sensors,
side, front.
Switching off automatically
Additional information:
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the Auto‐
matic Parking Assistant.
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Display in the camera view
Warning
General information
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
Light in the exterior mirror
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
are detected by the rear sensors and your own
vehicle is moving in reverse.
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
Display in the PDC Park Distance
Control view
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
depending on the equipment, the selected driv‐
ing mode.
Vehicle features and
options
Additional information:
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Adaptive Drive
Principle
Adaptive Drive is an actively controlled chassis.
The system increases driving comfort and mini‐
mizes the lateral tilt when driving around curves.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem or the Driving style analysis.
Chassis components
The chassis components are optimized for the
vehicle and its application range and thereby en‐
sure the best possible Driving Dynamics.
In particular in the ADAPTIVE driving mode, this
information is used to influence the adaptive
chassis control and the active roll stabilization
control. This further increases both the agility of
the vehicle as well as the lane stability.
Adaptive chassis
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Principle
The adaptive suspension is an intelligent control‐
lable suspension.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
Active roll stabilization
General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de‐
pending on the road condition and driving style.
Principle
Active roll stabilization reduces the roll tendency
of the body that occurs during rapid cornering or
during quick evasive maneuvers.
Tuning
General information
The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by
permanent adjustment on the front and rear
axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
The system offers different shock absorber set‐
tings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty
driving.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on
the road condition and driving style as well as,
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Agility and driving comfort are increased under all
driving conditions.
Adaptive M Chassis
Professional
Tuning
Principle
The system offers different settings ranging from
comfortable travel to sporty driving.
The Adaptive M Chassis Professional is an ac‐
tively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The
system increases driving comfort and minimizes
the lateral tilt when driving around curves.
The settings are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control.
Additional information:
The Adaptive M Chassis Professional encom‐
passes the following systems:
▷ Low-lying sport chassis.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
Adaptive M chassis
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
Principle
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, control‐
lable sport chassis.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem or the Driving style analysis.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de‐
pending on the road condition and driving style.
This information influences the control of the fol‐
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving
mode:
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
Tuning
The system offers different shock absorber set‐
tings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty
driving.
This further increases the agility and comfort of
the vehicle.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on
the selected driving mode as well as the road
condition and driving style.
Additional information:
Engine sound
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket version, you may be able to configure the
sound of the engine.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
4. "Engine sound"
5. Select the desired setting.
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and
options
Automatic climate control
Overview
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Buttons in the vehicle
Air quality
Climate control functions
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
Button
Function
Temperature.
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Interior filter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Air conditioning.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
▷ Ionizer.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
▷ Fragrancing.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control.
Interior filter
Depending on the equipment, the interior filter
cleans the inflowing outside air and improves the
air quality:
Air recirculation mode.
Air flow, manual.
▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the inflow‐
ing air.
Intensity AUTO program.
Air distribution, manual.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
SYNC program.
▷ Microbial particles and allergens are filtered.
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Button
Turning off
Function
When equipped with automatic climate control
with enhanced features:
Defrost function.
Complete system:
Rear window defroster.
▷ Button on the driver's side:
Press and hold the left side of the
button until the integrated automatic
climate control switches off.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
▷ Button on the passenger's side:
Press and hold the left side of the
button.
Opening the Climate menu.
For example, for the following
settings: upper body tempera‐
ture adjustment, pre-ventilation.
Temperature
Principle
Some of the functions can also be used via
voice, e.g., temperature.
The automatic climate control cools or heats to
the configured temperature and then keeps the
temperature constant.
Opening the Climate menu
Setting the temperature
Press the button.
Turning the wheel clockwise or
counter-clockwise: lowering or
raising the temperature.
The Climate menu is displayed.
All the climate control functions which can ad‐
justed via iDrive can be called up via the Climate
menu, e.g., upper body temperature adjustment,
pre-ventilation.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Switching climate control
functions on/off
Temperature of the ventilation
General information
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body region can be adjusted.
Turning on
Press one of the following buttons:
▷ Air conditioning.
▷ Maximum cooling.
▷ AUTO program.
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on
the adjusted temperature.
▷ Air recirculation mode.
▷ Right side of the air flow, manual button.
▷ Air distribution, manual.
▷ Defrosting the windshield
▷ Fragrancing.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger.
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Adjust temperature of the
ventilation
1. "CAR"
Functional requirement
The function is available with outside tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Temperature adjustment"
6. Set the desired temperature.
Switching maximum cooling on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated when maximum
cooling is switched on.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
region. The air vents need to be open for this.
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
Air conditioning
Principle
AUTO program
Principle
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
Functional requirement
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on.
The air distribution and the temperature are con‐
trolled automatically depending on the interior
temperature and the desired temperature setting
including the selected intensity of the air flow.
Switch climate control function
on/off
Switching the AUTO program on/off
Press the button.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
The LED of the button is illuminated
with the AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
Depending on the selected settings and outside
influences, the air is directed to the windshield,
side windows, upper body, and into the floor
area.
Air conditioning is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program.
Point the side air vents toward the side windows.
When using the cooling mode, condensation that
will exit below the vehicle.
The cooling function is switched on with the
AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
Principle
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Controlling the intensity of the air
flow
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
control for the air mass.
Air recirculation mode
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the interior air.
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase intensity.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Switch air recirculation on/off
Automatic recirculated-air
control
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the air-recirculation mode is switched on.
Principle
The automatic recirculated-air control recognizes
pollutants in the outside air. The outside air sup‐
ply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions.
General information
With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
Air flow, manual
Principle
With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Switching automatic recirculated-air
control on/off
1. "CAR"
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase air flow.
2. "Settings"
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Auto-recirculate"
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
The program is switched off automatically if the
settings on the front passenger side or in the
rear are changed.
Manual air distribution
Principle
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Defrost function
Principle
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
Press the button repeatedly. Select the
desired setting:
Switching the Defrost function
on/off
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Upper body region.
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on.
If there is any window condensation, switch on
the air conditioning. Make sure that air can flow
to the windshield.
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
Rear window defroster
Principle
Ice and condensation are removed from the rear
window quickly.
SYNC program
Principle
The Sync program can be used to apply the set‐
tings on the driver's side to the passenger's side
and the rear.
Functional requirement
The function is operational when the drive-ready
state is switched on.
Switching the SYNC program on/off
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the SYNC program is switched on.
Switching rear window defroster
on/off
Depending on the equipment, the following set‐
tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the
front-passenger side and the rear:
Press the button. The LED is illumi‐
nated with rear window defroster
switched on.
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ AUTO program.
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
Front ventilation
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
the vehicle.
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
Ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the air vents, arrow 2.
Principle
The air flow directions can be adjusted individu‐
ally for direct or indirect ventilation.
Ventilation in rear, center
Setting the ventilation
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
on the adjusted temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the air vents, arrow 2.
Indirect ventilation
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
gers. The vehicle interior is warmed or cooled in‐
directly, depending on the set temperature.
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control functions
Ventilation in the rear, on the
side
Button
Function
Temperature.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Air flow, manual.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the air vents, arrow 2.
Intensity Auto program.
Air distribution, manual.
Rear automatic climate
control
Switching climate control
functions on/off
Overview
Functional requirement
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Buttons in the vehicle
Switching on/off using iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Rear climate control"
Switching on using the button
Press one of the following buttons:
▷ Maximum cooling.
▷ AUTO program.
▷ Right side of the air flow, manual button.
▷ Air distribution, manual.
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Switching off using the button
AUTO program
Principle
Press and hold the left side of the but‐
ton.
The air flow, air distribution and the temperature
are controlled automatically.
Temperature
Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats to
the configured temperature and then keeps the
temperature constant.
Switching the AUTO program on/off
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
with the AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected settings and outside
influences, the air is directed to the upper body
and into the floor area.
Setting the temperature
Turning wheel clockwise or coun‐
ter-clockwise: lowering or raising
the temperature.
Controlling the intensity of the air
flow
With the AUTO program activated, the automatic
intensity control can be changed:
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Pressing the left or right side of the but‐
ton repeatedly: decrease or increase in‐
tensity.
Maximum cooling
Principle
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Air flow, manual
Principle
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Functional requirement
The function is available with outside tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
Switching maximum cooling on/off
Adjusting the air flow manually
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when maximum cooling is switched on.
Pressing the left or right side of the but‐
ton repeatedly: decrease or increase air
flow.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
region. The air vents need to be open for this.
The selected air flow is shown on the climate
control display.
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Manual air distribution
Principle
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
▷ Open the air vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
General information
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off.
Press the button repeatedly. Select the
desired setting:
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
Using the button
General information
Pre-ventilation
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-
ventilation can be switched on or off via the auto‐
matic climate control buttons.
Principle
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before
driving off with the pre-ventilation. Depending on
set temperature and ambient temperature, the
car's interior is ventilated or possibly heated us‐
ing the residual engine heat.
Turning on
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ SYNC program.
▷ MENU.
The activation time is determined based on the
outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure time.
Turning off
Press and hold the left side of the but‐
ton.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
ing the vehicle.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
Via iDrive
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehicle
battery. The system will be available again af‐
ter the engine is started or after a short trip.
Turning on
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Start now"
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
setting/activating the departure time and the
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control.
Via BMW display key
Turning on
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Setting the departure time
2. "Preconditioning setting"
Via iDrive
3. Tap the
icon or the
icon.
1. "CAR"
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
9. "OK"
Turning off
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the
4. "Stop"
icon or the
icon.
Display
Via BMW display key
icon on the automatic climate control indi‐
cates the system is switched on.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
REST is shown on the climate control display.
The residual engine heat is used.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the
icon or the
icon.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Departure time
Principle
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at
the time of departure.
Activating the departure time
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
Functional requirement
To switch on the parked-car ventilation automati‐
cally at the departure time, the departure time
must be activated first.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on before the set departure time.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
2. "Settings"
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
3. "Climate control"
outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.
4. "Pre-ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Activate the desired departure time.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Warning
When stationary climate control is in operation,
high temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system. If combustible materials, such as
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts
of the exhaust gas system, these materials can
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
oil or other combustible objects.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the
icon or the
icon.
4. Tap on the icon.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
,
Symbol on the climate control display
signals an activated departure time.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
Principle
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's interior
prior to departure to a comfortable temperature.
The system automatically cools, vents, and heats
depending on the interior, external, and set tem‐
perature. Snow and ice may be removed more
easily.
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive-
ready state is activated and deactivated
again.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
The system starts the engine automatically and
allows it to run for a limited period of time.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Safety information
▷ Air vents are opened.
DANGER
Enabling the automatic engine
start function
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐
fore using the system. Otherwise, the engine
cannot switch on automatically to climatize the
car's interior.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
Switching on via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Remote Engine Start"
3.
Tap on the icon.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
Switching off via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Switching on/off directly
General information
The system switches off automatically after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3.
Tap on the icon.
4. "Stop"
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system will
be available again as soon as the drive-ready
state is activated and deactivated again.
Switching off with the Start/Stop
button
The system can be switched off directly as fol‐
lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without op‐
erating the brake pedal.
Switching on via iDrive
1. "CAR"
Switching on via departure time
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Start now"
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
Press the button on the vehicle key three
times within 1 second.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap‐
proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
To switch off the system, press the button again
three times.
▷ Activate departure times.
The climate control function will start approxi‐
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time
and continue for approximately 5 more minutes
after the departure time.
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between
setting/activating the departure time and the
planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐
riod of time for the climate control.
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
6. Activate the desired departure time.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on once. The system will be available
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti‐
vated and deactivated again.
Activating the departure time via
BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Observe the information about the intended use
of the vehicle.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3.
Tap on the icon.
Additional information:
4. Activating the desired departure time:
Tap on the icon.
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Adjusting the departure time via
iDrive
Display
1. "CAR"
In the instrument cluster:
2. "Settings"
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-conditioning.
The vehicle is not ready to drive.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Departure plan"
The icon on the automatic climate con‐
trol signals an activated departure time.
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start
is running.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Adjusting the departure time via
BMW display key
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
The parking lights are switched on as long as the
system is switched on.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3.
Tap on the icon.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Ambient air package
Principle
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances.
Activating the departure time via
iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
General information
Fragrancing
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid
a habituation effect.
The following criteria can influence the percep‐
tion of scents in the vehicle interior:
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances.
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Temperature and atmospheric humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐
hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur
prior to the trip. The system is automatically
switched on with the pre-ventilation if fragrancing
was switched on at the completion of the last
trip.
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,
for instance fatigue.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Functional requirements
▷ The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
Safety information
▷ The interior temperature is be‐
tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
Warning
▷ Open the air vents to allow the fragrance to
flow out.
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can
cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐
functions, and damage to the system. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a
cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐
grance cartridge.
Selecting the fragrance
The car's interior is fragranced depending on the
selected fragrance.
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
1. "CAR"
Ionizer
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
Principle
The ionizer cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles and improves the air quality.
5. Select the desired fragrance.
Switching fragrancing on/off,
adjusting intensity
Switching the ionizer on/off
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
5. "Level"
3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance car‐
tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide it
from the fragrance cartridge.
6. Select the desired setting.
Display
The illustrations on the Control Display show the
actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
ing.
4. Insert the removed cover on the rear of the
fragrance cartridge.
When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a
Check Control message is displayed once.
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Climate control
CONTROLS
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge
snaps lightly into place.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.
Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could be
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Recycling
Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
to a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
indicated on the Control Display.
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information for the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
system to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Univer‐
sal Remote Control.
Principle
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
Additional questions are answered by:
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
General information
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
6.
▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
Programming
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
remote control.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
peat steps 3 to 5.
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Initial commissioning:
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
led system after repeated programming, please
check if the system to be controlled features a
rolling code radio system.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes
green rapidly. This erases all programming of
the buttons on the interior mirror.
Refer to the operating instructions for the sys‐
tem.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will
slowly begin flashing orange.
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
Please read the operating instructions to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Synchronizing the universal remote control with
the system:
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to end synchroniza‐
tion. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not completed,
the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Reprogramming individual
buttons
Operation
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐
lease the button.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information for the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed.
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Ashtray
Front center console
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green fast.
Opening
1. Push the cover forward until it engages.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
the ashtray cover upward.
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
Folding in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Emptying
Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the
cup holder.
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the objects.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Take hold of the ciga‐
rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
holders.
Rear center console
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage. In‐
sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again
after using the socket.
The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
Front center console
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Principle
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Front center console
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
Push the cover forward until it engages.
NOTICE
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery
via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle
may overload or damage the 12 V electrical
system. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Pull off the cover.
Rear center console
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage. In‐
sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again
after using the socket.
A socket is located in the center console.
Pull off the cover.
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
In the cargo area
Steptronic transmission: in the
center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the cover is clear while opening
and closing it.
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo
area. Unfold the cover.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB port in the section
on USB connections.
Additional information:
Push the cover forward until it engages.
In the center armrest
A USB port is located in the center console.
Properties:
A USB port is located in the center armrest.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transmission.
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
▷ For data transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
NOTE
In the rear center console
This device has been tested for human exposure
limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐
tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating the
device.
Two USB ports are located in the center console
in the rear passenger compartment.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
Mounting position of the product.
Safety information
Warning
Wireless charging tray
Principle
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. Placing storage
devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards,
cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal
transmission, between the device and the tray
may impair the card function. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. When
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
no objects between the device and the tray.
The wireless charging tray enables the following
wireless functions:
▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐
bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐
bile devices, which support the Qi standard.
▷ Charging the BMW Display key.
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make sure
there are no objects between it and the wireless
charging tray.
During charging, the surface of the tray and the
mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐
peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge
current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐
lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐
porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the
mobile phone owner's manual.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
The charge indicator shows on the Control
Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐
ity is being charged.
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Removing the mobile phone
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Remove the mobile phone.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue
The mobile phone is charging.
1
2
LED
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted mobile phone with Qi ca‐
pability is fully charged.
Storage area
Functional requirements
Orange The mobile phone is not charging.
▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support
the required Qi standard.
Temperature on the mobile phone
possibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi
standard, the mobile phone can be charged
using a special Qi-compatible charging case.
Red
The mobile phone is not charging.
Contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ A possible parking operation via Remote
Control Parking must be completed.
▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the
mobile phone.
Forgotten warning
General information
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten
warning function, a warning can be output if a
mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in
the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐
cle.
▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to
a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐
wise, the charging function may be impaired.
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in
the center of the tray.
Operation
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Inserting the mobile phone
Activating
1. "CAR"
The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐
mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x
0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
2. "Settings"
1. Open the tray cover.
3. "General settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. Activate reminder.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
▷ AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐
booster.com/).
System limits
At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in
the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile
phone may be limited and some functions may
no longer work.
▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://
www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-
booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster de‐
vice with your wireless provider.
LTE-Compensator - Information
and User Manual
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease
operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐
sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐
more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐
vated by your local BMW dealer.
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the
best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-
Compensator) is used in conjunction with the
WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this
booster:
You must not remove the booster from the car
nor use it with any other than the preinstalled
coupling device or antenna. Any modification of
the existing antenna or coupling device as well as
the use of other antennas or coupling devices
will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐
cense.
This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐
VICE with your wireless provider and have your
provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐
sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐
ers may not consent to the use of this device on
their network. If you are unsure, contact your
provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐
proved antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You
MUST cease operating this device immediately if
requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless
service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐
tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate
for calls served by using this device.
The booster device fulfills the network protection
standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐
modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain
limits.
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
Model Number: LTECOMPB0
Part Number: 6803145-01
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
Please observe additionally the following infor‐
mation
▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register
their signal boosters by calling their toll-free
number.
▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐
bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t-
mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://
www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/
register-signal-booster.html).
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and
options
Front passenger side glove
compartment
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐
ment immediately after using it.
Storage compartments
Opening the glove compartment
General information
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
terior.
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing the glove compartment
Fold cover closed.
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
compartment.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Do
not use anti-slip pads.
After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐
cle key can be handed over without the
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is
parked by valet parking.
Safety information
Additional information:
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Driver's side glove
compartment
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐
ment immediately after using it.
Storage compartment in
the center console
Opening the storage
compartment
Opening the glove compartment
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Closing the storage
compartment
Pull the handle.
Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Closing the glove compartment
Fold cover closed.
Storage compartment in
the rear center console
Compartments in the doors
The rear of the center console contains one or
two storage compartments.
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Opening the cup holder
Center armrest, front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening the storage
compartment
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Press the button.
Closing the storage
compartment
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Press cover down until it engages.
Closing the cup holder
Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Closing the cup holder
Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.
NOTICE
Clothes hooks
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
damage. Press back the covers before the cen‐
ter armrest is folded up.
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
Safety information
Opening and closing the cup
holder
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
General information
The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
Opening the cup holder
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
Fold the center armrest forward.
Press the button and fold out the cup holder
fully.
Downsizing the cup holder
To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded
in in 2 steps.
Enlarging the cup holder
To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it
in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again
fully.
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Make sure that no flu‐
ids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Safety information
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden tire
pressure loss. Driving characteristics may be
negatively impacted, reducing lane stability,
lengthening the braking distances and chang‐
ing the steering response. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐
pacity of the tires and never exceed the
permitted gross weight.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
hicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown about the car's interior while
driving, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a
cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐
terior.
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Cargo area
CONTROLS
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Payload
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Multifunction hook
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
General information
A multifunction hook is located on the left side in
the cargo area.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy
luggage in the cargo area if it has been appro‐
priately secured.
▷ Fold down the rear seat backrests completely
to stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or, depending on the equipment, with
a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Folding out the multifunction
hook
Opening the storage
compartment
Press on the multifunction hook and turn until it
engages.
Pull the handle.
With emergency wheel:
storage compartment
Net
under the cargo floor panel
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
General information
There is a storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel.
Storage compartment on
the right side
Opening the storage
compartment
A storage compartment is available on the right
side of the cargo area.
Storage compartment on
the left side
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Closing the storage
compartment
Push the cargo floor panel downward.
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Cargo area
CONTROLS
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Through-loading system
Principle
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
the rear seat backrests.
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property, among other potential dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the rear backrest including head restraint is
clear when folding down.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–
20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the
center section can be folded down separately.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from
the cargo area. The center section can be sepa‐
rately folded down from the rear.
Folding down the rear seat
backrest from the cargo area
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt
in the rear using the latch plate of another
safety belt.
Safety information
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear shelf.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
3. Push the corresponding head restraint down
as far as it will go.
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest. The un‐
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting
or improper installation of the child seat. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure
that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Cargo area
CONTROLS
locked rear seat backrest moves forward
slightly.
With an emergency wheel:
enlarging the cargo area
Principle
The emergency wheel and any related compo‐
nents can be temporarily removed to enlarge the
cargo area.
Removing the emergency wheel
and the storage compartments
1. To remove the cargo area floor, pull it upward
directly behind the rear backrests.
5. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Folding back the backrest
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seat position and engage it.
2. Open the ratchet strap.
3. Remove the tool holder.
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on
the rear shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
Folding down the center section
1. Fold down the center head restraint.
2. Pull lever and fold the center section forward.
4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐
age well.
5. Loosen the ratchet strap from the lashing
eyes.
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
Cargo area
CONTROLS
6. Remove the storage compartment.
7. Remove the storage well.
8. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Inserting the emergency wheel
and the storage compartments
Proceed in reverse order to insert the emergency
wheel and the storage compartments.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operating instructions
included in the protective jacket.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove
the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A37F46 - VI/21
